HT45F3830v100.pdf

Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
HT45F3830
Revision: V1.00
Date: ������������
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Table of Contents
Features............................................................................................................. 6
CPU Features.......................................................................................................................... 6
Peripheral Features.................................................................................................................. 6
General Description ......................................................................................... 7
Block Diagram................................................................................................... 8
Pin Assignment................................................................................................. 8
Pin Descriptions............................................................................................... 9
Absolute Maximum Ratings............................................................................11
D.C. Characteristics........................................................................................ 12
A.C. Characteristics........................................................................................ 13
Slew Rate Control Characteristics................................................................ 14
LVD & LVR Electrical Characteristics........................................................... 14
Over Current/Voltage Protection Electrical Characteristics ...................... 15
Power on Reset Electrical Characteristics................................................... 16
System Architecture....................................................................................... 17
Clocking and Pipelining.......................................................................................................... 17
Program Counter.................................................................................................................... 18
Stack...................................................................................................................................... 19
Arithmetic and Logic Unit – ALU............................................................................................ 19
Flash Program Memory.................................................................................. 20
Structure................................................................................................................................. 20
Special Vectors...................................................................................................................... 20
Look-up Table......................................................................................................................... 20
Table Program Example......................................................................................................... 21
In Circuit Programming.......................................................................................................... 22
On-Chip Debug Support – OCDS.......................................................................................... 22
RAM Data Memory.......................................................................................... 23
Structure................................................................................................................................. 23
General Purpose Data Memory............................................................................................. 24
Special Purpose Data Memory.............................................................................................. 24
Special Function Register Description......................................................... 25
Indirect Addressing Registers – IAR0, IAR1.......................................................................... 25
Memory Pointers – MP0, MP1............................................................................................... 25
Bank Pointer – BP.................................................................................................................. 26
Accumulator – ACC................................................................................................................ 26
Program Counter Low Register – PCL................................................................................... 26
Look-up Table Registers – TBLP, TBHP, TBLH...................................................................... 27
Status Register – STATUS..................................................................................................... 27
Rev. 1.00
2
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
EEPROM Data Memory................................................................................... 29
EEPROM Data Memory Structure......................................................................................... 29
EEPROM Registers............................................................................................................... 29
Reading Data from the EEPROM ......................................................................................... 31
Writing Data to the EEPROM................................................................................................. 31
Write Protection...................................................................................................................... 31
EEPROM Interrupt................................................................................................................. 31
Programming Considerations................................................................................................. 32
Oscillators....................................................................................................... 33
Oscillator Overview................................................................................................................ 33
System Clock Configurations................................................................................................. 33
Internal RC Oscillator – HIRC................................................................................................ 34
Internal 32kHz Oscillator – LIRC............................................................................................ 34
Operating Modes and System Clocks.......................................................... 35
System Clocks....................................................................................................................... 35
System Operating Modes....................................................................................................... 36
Control Registers................................................................................................................... 37
Operating Mode Switching .................................................................................................... 39
Standby Current Considerations............................................................................................ 43
Wake-up................................................................................................................................. 43
Watchdog Timer.............................................................................................. 44
Watchdog Timer Clock Source............................................................................................... 44
Watchdog Timer Control Register.......................................................................................... 44
Watchdog Timer Operation.................................................................................................... 45
Reset and Initialisation................................................................................... 47
Reset Functions..................................................................................................................... 47
Reset Initial Conditions.......................................................................................................... 49
Input/Output Ports.......................................................................................... 52
Pull-high Resistors................................................................................................................. 52
Port A Wake-up...................................................................................................................... 53
I/O Port Control Registers...................................................................................................... 53
Slew Rate Control.................................................................................................................. 54
Source Current Selection....................................................................................................... 55
Pin-shared Function............................................................................................................... 56
I/O Pin Structures................................................................................................................... 59
Programming Considerations................................................................................................. 59
Timer Modules – TM....................................................................................... 60
Introduction............................................................................................................................ 60
TM Operation......................................................................................................................... 60
TM Clock Source.................................................................................................................... 61
TM Interrupts.......................................................................................................................... 61
TM External Pins.................................................................................................................... 61
TM Input/Output Pin Control Register.................................................................................... 62
Programming Considerations................................................................................................. 63
Rev. 1.00
3
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Compact Type TM – CTM............................................................................... 64
Compact TM Operation.......................................................................................................... 64
Compact Type TM Register Description................................................................................ 64
Compact Type TM Operating Modes..................................................................................... 68
Standard Type TM – STM............................................................................... 74
Standard TM Operation.......................................................................................................... 74
Standard Type TM Register Description................................................................................ 74
Standard Type TM Operating Modes..................................................................................... 78
Periodic Type TM – PTM ................................................................................ 87
Periodic TM Operation .......................................................................................................... 87
Periodic Type TM Register Description ................................................................................. 87
Periodic Type TM Operating Modes ...................................................................................... 91
Nebuliser Resonance Detector.................................................................... 100
Water Shortage Protection........................................................................... 100
Over Current/Voltage Protection................................................................. 100
OCVP Operation.................................................................................................................. 100
OCVP Control Registers...................................................................................................... 101
Input Voltage Range............................................................................................................. 105
Offset Calibration................................................................................................................. 105
I C Interface................................................................................................... 107
2
I2C Interface Operation ........................................................................................................ 107
I2C Registers........................................................................................................................ 108
I2C Bus Communication .......................................................................................................112
I2C Bus Start Signal ..............................................................................................................113
Slave Address ......................................................................................................................113
I2C Bus Read/Write Signal ...................................................................................................113
I2C Bus Slave Address Acknowledge Signal ........................................................................113
I2C Bus Data and Acknowledge Signal ................................................................................114
I2C Time-out Control..............................................................................................................115
Interrupts........................................................................................................117
Interrupt Registers.................................................................................................................117
Interrupt Operation............................................................................................................... 122
External Interrupts................................................................................................................ 123
OCVP Interrupt..................................................................................................................... 124
Multi-function Interrupts........................................................................................................ 124
Time Base Interrupts............................................................................................................ 124
I2C Interrupt.......................................................................................................................... 125
EEPROM Interrupt............................................................................................................... 126
LVD Interrupt........................................................................................................................ 126
TM Interrupts........................................................................................................................ 126
Interrupt Wake-up Function.................................................................................................. 127
Programming Considerations............................................................................................... 127
Rev. 1.00
4
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Low Voltage Detector – LVD........................................................................ 128
LVD Register........................................................................................................................ 128
LVD Operation...................................................................................................................... 129
LCD SCOM Function.................................................................................... 130
LCD Operation..................................................................................................................... 130
LCD Bias Current Control.................................................................................................... 130
Configuration Option.................................................................................... 131
Application Circuit........................................................................................ 131
Instruction Set............................................................................................... 132
Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 132
Instruction Timing................................................................................................................. 132
Moving and Transferring Data.............................................................................................. 132
Arithmetic Operations........................................................................................................... 132
Logical and Rotate Operation.............................................................................................. 133
Branches and Control Transfer............................................................................................ 133
Bit Operations...................................................................................................................... 133
Table Read Operations........................................................................................................ 133
Other Operations.................................................................................................................. 133
Instruction Set Summary............................................................................. 134
Table Conventions................................................................................................................ 134
Instruction Definition.................................................................................... 136
Package Information.................................................................................... 145
16-pin NSOP (150mil) Outline Dimensions.......................................................................... 146
20-pin NSOP (150mil) Outline Dimensions.......................................................................... 147
24-pin SOP (300mil) Outline Dimensions............................................................................ 148
Rev. 1.00
5
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Features
CPU Features
• Operating Voltage
♦♦ fSYS =12MHz: 2.7V ~ 5.5V
♦♦ fSYS =32kHz: 2.2V ~ 5.5V
• Up to 0.33μs instruction cycle with 12MHz system clock at VDD=5V
• Power down and wake-up functions to reduce power consumption
• Oscillators
♦♦ Internal High Speed RC – HIRC
♦♦ Internal Low Speed 32kHz RC – LIRC
• Multi-mode operation: NORMAL, SLOW, IDLE and SLEEP
• Fully integrated internal 12MHz oscillator requires no external components
• All instructions executed in one or two instruction cycles
• Table read instructions
• 63 powerful instructions
• 4-level subroutine nesting
• Bit manipulation instruction
Peripheral Features
• Flash Program Memory: 2K×16
• RAM Data Memory: 128×8
• EEPROM Memory: 64×8
• Watchdog Timer function
• 22 bidirectional I/O lines
• Two pin-shared external interrupts
• Slew Rate Control for PC1 Port Output
• Programmable I/O port source current for LED applications
• Multiple Timer Modules for time measure, input capture, compare match output, PWM output
function or single pulse output function
♦♦ 10-bit CTM × 1
♦♦ 10-bit PTM × 2
♦♦ 10-bit STM × 1
• Over Current/Voltage Protection (OCVP) Function with interrupt
• Dual Time-Base functions for generation of fixed time interrupt signals
• I2C Interface
• Low voltage reset function
• Low voltage detect function
• Software controlled 4-SCOM lines LCD Driver with 1/2 bias
• Flash program memory can be re-programmed up to 100,000 times
• Flash program memory data retention > 10 years
• EEPROM data memory can be re-programmed up to 1,000,000 times
• EEPROM data memory data retention > 10 years
• Package Type: 16/20-pin NSOP, 24-pin SOP
Rev. 1.00
6
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
General Description
The HT45F3830 is a device dedicated for use in ultrasonic nebuliser applications. The application
principle for ultrasonic nebulisers is to use electronic high-frequency oscillation and ceramic
nebulising chip high-frequency resonance to break up the liquid water molecules thus generating
a fine mist without requiring heating or any chemical substances. Compared with the heating
nebulisation method, the ultrasonic method can result in 90% energy savings. Additionally, during
the nebulisation process, it can release a large number of negative ions which can precipitate smoke
and dust particles in air by electrostatic reaction and also can effectively remove formaldehyde,
carbon monoxide, bacteria and other harmful substances thus generating cleaner air and reducing the
possibility of disease transmission.
The device is a Flash Memory type 8-bit high performance RISC architecture microcontroller
containing special internal circuitry for ultrasonic nebuliser applications. Offering users the
convenience of Flash Memory multi-programming features, this device also includes a wide range of
functions and features. Other memory includes an area of RAM Data Memory as well as an area of
EEPROM memory for storage of non-volatile data such as serial numbers, calibration data etc. Analog
features include an over current protection function. Multiple and extremely flexible Timer Modules
provide timing, pulse generation and PWM generation functions. Protective features such as an internal
Watchdog Timer, Low Voltage Reset and Low Voltage Detector coupled with excellent noise immunity
and ESD protection ensure that reliable operation is maintained in hostile electrical environments.
The device also includes fully integrated low and high speed oscillators which can be flexibly
used for different applications. The ability to operate and switch dynamically between a range of
operating modes using different clock sources gives users the ability to optimise microcontroller
operation and minimise power consumption. Easy communication with the outside world is
provided using the internal I2C interface.
While the inclusion of flexible I/O programming features, Time-Base functions along with an
adjustable ultrasonic nebuliser resonant frequency generator and many other features ensure that the
device will find excellent use in different ultrasonic nebuliser applications.
This device can use the nebuliser resonance detector to detect the nebuliser resonant frequency,
and use the nebuliser resonant frequency selection to output PFM resonant frequency for nebuliser
control, it can also use the water shortage protection and OCVP functions for water shortage
detection.
Rev. 1.00
7
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Block Diagram
Low Voltage
Detect
Flash/EEPROM
Programming Circuitry
(ICP/OCDS)
8-bit
RISC
MCU
Core
Interrupt
Controller
Low Voltage Reset
Internal RC
Oscillators
EEPROM
Data
Memory
Reset
Circuit
Flash
Program
Memory
RAM
Data
Memory
Time
Base
Watchdog
Timer
Nebuliser Resonant Slew Rate
Frequency Selection Controller
Nebuliser Resonance
Detector & Water Shortage
Protection
I2C
Interface
I/O
Ports
Timer
Modules
Over Current/Voltage
Protection
OCVPS[1:0]
Pin Assignment
PTPI/PC1
1
1�
VSS
�
15
PA0/SDA/ICPDA/OCDSDA
VDD
�
14
PTCK1/PC0
4
1�
OCVPAI0/PB0
OCVPAI0/PB1
OCVPAI0/PB�
VREF/PTCK0/PA7
5
1�
OCVPAI0/STP/PA4
OCVPAI0/CTP/PA1
�
11
OCVPAI0/PB�
7
10
OCVPCI/INT1/STCK/PA5
OCVPAI0/INT0/CTCK/PA�
8
9
OCVPAI0/PTP0/PA�
HT45F3830/HT45V3830
16NSOP-A
PTPI/PC1
1
�0
PA0/SDA/ICPDA/OCDSDA
VSS
�
19
VDD
PTCK1/PC0
�
18
4
17
PA�/SCL/ICPCK/OCDSCK
OCVPAI0/PB0
OCVPAI0/PB1
VREF/PTCK0/PA7
5
1�
OCVPAI0/PB�
SCO��/PB7
�
15
OCVPAI0/PB�
SCO��/PB�
7
14
PB4/SCO�0
OCVPAI0/STP/PA4
8
1�
PB5/SCO�1
OCVPAI0/CTP/PA1
9
1�
10
11
OCVPCI/INT/STCK/PA5
OCVPAI0/PTP0/PA�
OCVPAI0/INT0/CTCK/PA�
HT45F3830/HT45V3830
20NSOP-A
Rev. 1.00
8
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
PA0/SDA/ICPDA/OCDSDA
PTPI/PC1
VSS
1
�4
�
��
PA�/SCL/ICPCK/OCDSCK
VDD
�
��
OCVPAI0/PB0
PTCK1/PC0
VREF/PTCK0/PA7
4
�1
OCVPAI0/PB1
5
�0
OCVPAI0/PB�
SCO��/PB7
�
19
OCVPAI0/PB�
SCO��/PB�
7
18
PB4/SCO�0
PC4
PC5
8
17
PB5/SCO�1
9
1�
PC�
OCVPAI0/STP/PA4
10
15
PC�
OCVPAI0/CTP/PA1
11
14
OCVPAI0/INT0/CTCK/PA�
1�
1�
OCVPCI/INT/STCK/PA5
OCVPAI0/PTP0/PA�
HT45F3830/HT45V3830
24SOP-A
Note: 1. If the pin-shared pin functions have multiple output functions, the desired pin-shared function is determined
using corresponding software control bits.
2. The actual device and its equivalent OCDS EV device share the same package type, however the OCDS
EV device part number is HT45V3830. Pins OCDSCK and OCDSDA which are pin-shared with PA2 and
PA0 are only used for the OCDS EV device.
Pin Descriptions
With the exception of the power pins and some relevant transformer control pins, all pins on this
device can be referenced by their Port name, e.g. PA0, PA1 etc, which refer to the digital I/O
function of the pins. However these Port pins are also shared with other function such as the Timer
Module pins etc. The function of each pin is listed in the following table, however the details behind
how each pin is configured is contained in other sections of the datasheet.
Note that the pin description refers to the largest package size, as a result some pins may not exist on
smaller package types.
Pin Name
PA0/SDA/ICPDA/
OCDSDA
PA1/CTP/OCVPAI0
PA2/SCL/ICPCK/
OCDSCK
Function
OPT
I/T
O/T
PA0
PAPU
PAWU
ST
CMOS
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up
and wake-up.
SDA
IICC0
ST
NMOS
I2C data/address line
ICPDA
—
ST
CMOS
In-circuit programming data/address pin
OCDSDA
—
ST
CMOS
On-chip debug support data/address pin, for EV
chip only
PA1
PAPU
PAWU
CTRL3
ST
CMOS
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up
and wake-up.
CTP
CTRL3
—
CMOS
CTM output
OCVPAI0
CTRL2
CTRL3
AN
—
PA2
PAPU
PAWU
ST
CMOS
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up
and wake-up.
SCL
IICC0
ST
NMOS
I2C clock line
ICPCK
—
ST
—
In-circuit programming clock pin
—
On-chip debug support clock pin, for EV chip
only
OCDSCK
Rev. 1.00
—
ST
9
Description
OCVPAI0 input path
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Pin Name
PA3/ INT0/CTCK
/OCVPAI0
PA4/ STP/OCVPAI0
PA5/OCVPCI/
INT1/STCK
PA6/PTP0/
OCVPAI0
PA7/PTCK0/VREF
Function
OPT
I/T
O/T
PA3
PAPU
PAWU
CTRL3
ST
CMOS
INT0
CTRL3
INTEG
ST
—
External interrupt 0
CTCK
CTRL3
CTMC0
ST
—
CTM clock input
OCVPAI0
CTRL2
CTRL3
AN
—
OCVPAI0 input path
PA4
PAPU
PAWU
CTRL3
ST
CMOS
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up
and wake-up.
STP
CTRL3
ST
CMOS
STM output or capture input
OCVPAI0
CTRL2
CTRL3
AN
—
PA5
PAPU
PAWU
CTRL3
ST
CMOS
OCVPCI
CTRL3
AN
—
OCVP comparator non-inverting signal input
INT1
CTRL3
INTEG
ST
—
External interrupt 1
STCK
CTRL3
STMC0
ST
—
STM clock input
PA6
PAPU
PAWU
CTRL3
ST
CMOS
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up
and wake-up.
PTP0
CTRL3
ST
CMOS
PTM0 output or capture input
OCVPAI0
CTRL2
CTRL3
AN
—
PA7
PAPU
PAWU
CTRL4
ST
CMOS
PTCK0
CTRL4
PTM0C0
ST
—
PTM0 clock input or capture input
VREF
CTRL4
AN
—
DAC voltage reference
PB0
PBPU
CTRL4
ST
CMOS
OCVPAI0
CTRL2
CTRL4
AN
—
PB1
PBPU
CTRL4
ST
CMOS
OCVPAI0
CTRL2
CTRL4
AN
—
PB2
PBPU
CTRL4
ST
CMOS
OCVPAI0
CTRL2
CTRL4
AN
—
PB3
PBPU
CTRL4
ST
CMOS
OCVPAI0
CTRL2
CTRL4
AN
—
PB4
PBPU
CTRL5
ST
CMOS
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up
SCOM0
CTRL5
—
SCOM
LCD SCOM function pin
PB0/OCVPAI0
PB1/OCVPAI0
PB2/OCVPAI0
PB3/OCVPAI0
PB4/SCOM0
Rev. 1.00
10
Description
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up
and wake-up.
OCVPAI0 input path
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up
and wake-up.
OCVPAI0 input path
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up
and wake-up.
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up
OCVPAI0 input path
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up
OCVPAI0 input path
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up
OCVPAI0 input path
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up
OCVPAI0 input path
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Pin Name
PB5/SCOM1
PB6/SCOM2
PB7/SCOM3
PC0/PTCK1
PC1/ PTP1
Function
OPT
I/T
O/T
PB5
PBPU
CTRL5
Description
ST
CMOS
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up
SCOM1
CTRL5
—
SCOM
LCD SCOM function pin
PB6
PBPU
CTRL5
ST
CMOS
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up
SCOM2
CTRL5
—
SCOM
LCD SCOM function pin
PB7
PBPU
CTRL5
ST
CMOS
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up
SCOM3
CTRL5
—
SCOM
LCD SCOM function pin
PC0
PCPU
ST
CMOS
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up
PTCK1
PTM1C0
ST
—
PC1
PCPU
CTRL4
ST
CMOS
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up
PTM1 clock input or capture input
PTP1
CTRL4
ST
CMOS
PTM1 output or capture input
PC2~PC5
PCPU
ST
CMOS
General purpose I/O. Register enabled pull-up
VDD
VDD
—
PWR
—
Positive power supply
VSS
VSS
—
PWR
—
Negative power supply
PC2~PC5
Legend: I/T: Input type
O/T: Output type
OPT: Optional by register option
PWR: Power
ST: Schmitt Trigger input
CMOS: CMOS output
NMOS: NMOS output
AN: Analog signal
SCOM: Software LCD COM output
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Supply Voltage.................................................................................................VSS−0.3V to VSS+6.0V
Input Voltage...................................................................................................VSS−0.3V to VDD+0.3V
Storage Temperature.....................................................................................................-50˚C to 125˚C
Operating Temperature...................................................................................................-40˚C to 85˚C
IOL Total...................................................................................................................................... 80mA
IOH Total.....................................................................................................................................-80mA
Total Power Dissipation.......................................................................................................... 500mW
Note: These are stress ratings only. Stresses exceeding the range specified under "Absolute Maximum
Ratings" may cause substantial damage to these devices. Functional operation of these devices at
other conditions beyond those listed in the specification is not implied and prolonged exposure to
extreme conditions may affect devices reliability.
Rev. 1.00
11
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
D.C. Characteristics
Ta=25°C
Symbol
VDD
Parameter
Typ.
Max.
Unit
V
—
fSYS=fHIRC=12MHz
2.7
—
5.5
—
fSYS=fLIRC=32kHz
2.2
—
5.5
V
Operating Current (HIRC)
3V No load, all peripherals off,
5V fSYS=fHIRC=12MHz
—
2.2
3.3
mA
—
5
7.5
mA
Operating Current (LIRC)
3V No load, all peripherals off,
5V fSYS=fLIRC=32kHz
—
10
20
μA
μA
3V No load, all peripherals off,
Standby Current (SLEEP Mode)
5V WDT off
Standby Current (SLEEP Mode)
3V No load, all peripherals off,
5V WDT on
Standby Current (IDLE0 Mode)
3V No load, all peripherals off,
5V fSUB on
Standby Current (IDLE1 Mode,
HIRC)
3V No load, all peripherals off,
5V fSUB on, fSYS=fHIRC=12MHz
5V
VIL
Input Low Voltage for I/O Ports
VIH
Input High Voltage for I/O Ports
IOL
Sink Current for I/O Ports
(Except PC1 Port)
Rev. 1.00
Min.
Operating Voltage (LIRC)
ISTB
RPH
Conditions
Operating Voltage (HIRC)
IDD
IOH
Test Conditions
VDD
Source Current for I/O Ports
(Except PC1 Port)
Pull-high Resistance for I/O
Ports
—
—
30
50
—
0.2
0.8
μA
—
0.5
1
μA
—
1.3
5
μA
—
2.2
10
μA
—
1.3
3
μA
—
2.2
5
μA
—
0.6
1.2
mA
—
1.2
2.4
mA
0
—
1.5
V
V
—
—
0
—
0.2
VDD
5V
—
3.5
—
5
V
—
—
V
0.8VDD
—
VDD
3V VOL=0.1VDD
16
32
—
5V VOL=0.1VDD
32
65
—
3V VOH=0.9VDD, SLEDCn[m+1,m]=00B
5V n=0, 1; m=0, 2, 4, 6
-0.7
-1.5
—
-1.5
-2.9
—
3V VOH=0.9VDD, SLEDCn[m+1,m]=01B
5V n=0, 1; m=0, 2, 4, 6
-1.3
-2.5
—
-2.5
-5.1
—
3V VOH=0.9VDD, SLEDCn[m+1,m]=10B
5V n=0, 1; m=0, 2, 4, 6
-1.8
-3.6
—
-3.6
-7.3
—
3V VOH=0.9VDD, SLEDCn[m+1,m]=11B
5V n=0, 1; m=0, 2, 4, 6
-4
-8
—
-8
-16
—
3V
—
20
60
100
kΩ
5V
—
10
30
50
kΩ
12
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
A.C. Characteristics
Symbol
fSYS
fHIRC
Parameter
Ta=25°C
Test Conditions
VDD
Conditions
Typ.
Max.
Unit
System Clock (HIRC)
2.7V ~ 5.5V fSYS=fHIRC=12MHz
—
12
—
MHz
System Clock (LIRC)
2.2V ~ 5.5V fSYS=fLIRC=32kHz
—
32
—
kHz
High Speed Internal RC Oscillator
(HIRC)
3V
Ta=25°C
-2%
12
+2% MHz
5V
Ta=25°C
-2%
12
+2% MHz
2.7V~ 5.5V Ta=25°C
-5%
12
+5% MHz
3V
Ta=0°C ~ 70°C
-7%
12
+7%
MHz
5V
Ta=0°C ~ 70°C
-7%
12
+7%
MHz
3V
Ta= -40°C ~ 85°C
-10%
12
+10% MHz
5V
Ta= -40°C ~ 85°C
2.7V ~ 5.5V Ta=0°C ~ 70°C
2.7V ~ 5.5V Ta= -40°C ~ 85°C
Low Speed Internal RC Oscillator
(LIRC)
-7%
12
+7% MHz
-7%
12
+7% MHz
-10%
12
+10% MHz
-10%
32
+10%
3V ± 0.3V Ta= -40°C ~ 85°C
-40%
32
+40%
kHz
2.2V ~ 5.5V Ta= -40°C ~ 85°C
-50%
32
+60%
kHz
-10%
32
+10%
kHz
-40%
32
+40%
kHz
3V
fLIRC
Min.
Ta=25°C
Ta=25°C
5V
5V ± 0.5V Ta= -40°C ~ 85°C
kHz
tTIMER
xTCKn Input Pin Minimum Pulse
Width
—
—
—
30
—
ns
tDEW
Data EEPROM Write Time
—
—
—
2
4
ms
tINT
External Interrupt Minimum Pulse
Width
—
—
1
3.3
5
μs
System Reset Delay Time
(Power-on Reset, LVR Hardware
Reset, LVR Software Reset, WDT
Software Reset)
—
—
25
50
100
ms
System reset delay time (WDT
Time-out Hardware Cold Reset)
—
—
8.3
16.7
33.3
ms
tRSTD
System Start-up Timer Period
(Wake-up from Power Down Mode
and fSYS off)
tSST
System Start-up Timer Period
(Slow Mode ↔ Normal Mode)
System Start-up Timer Period
(Wake-up from Power Down Mode
and fSYS on)
System Start-up Timer Period
(WDT Time-out Hardware Cold
Reset)
I2C Standard Mode (100kHz)
System Frequency
fI2C
I2C Fast Mode (400kHz) System
Frequency
—
fSYS=fH ~ fH / 64,
fH=fHIRC
16
—
—
tHIRC
—
fSYS=fSUB=fLIRC
2
—
—
tLIRC
—
fHIRC off → on
(HTO=1)
16
—
—
tHIRC
—
fSYS=fHIRC ~ fHIRC /64
2
—
—
tH
—
fSYS=fLIRC
2
—
—
tSUB
0
—
—
tH
—
—
—
No clock debounce
2
—
—
MHz
—
2 system clocks debounce
4
—
—
MHz
—
4 system clocks debounce
8
—
—
MHz
—
No clock debounce
5
—
—
MHz
—
2 system clocks debounce
10
—
—
MHz
—
4 system clocks debounce
20
—
—
MHz
Note: 1. tSYS= 1/fSYS; tSUB=1/fSUB; tHIRC= 1/fHIRC
2. To maintain the accuracy of the internal HIRC oscillator frequency, a 0.1μF decoupling capacitor should
be connected between VDD and VSS and located as close to the device as possible.
3. Frequency accuracy (trim at VDD=3V/5V, FADJH=01H, FADJL=00H).
Rev. 1.00
13
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Slew Rate Control Characteristics
Operating Temperature: -40°C~85°C, unless otherwise specify
Symbol
Parameter
IOL
PC1 Port Sink Current
IOH
PC1 Port Source Current
SRRISE
SRFALL
Output Rising edge Slew
Rate for PC1 Port
Output Falling edge Slew
Rate for PC1 Port
Test Conditions
VDD
3V
Conditions
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
24
60
—
mA
60
150
—
mA
-24
-60
—
mA
-60
-150
—
mA
5V
SLEWC0[1:0]=00B
0.5V to 4.5V, CLOAD=1000pF
200
—
—
V/μs
5V
SLEWC0[1:0]=01B
0.5V to 4.5V, CLOAD=1000pF
—
60
—
V/μs
5V
SLEWC0[1:0] = 10B
0.5V to 4.5V, CLOAD=1000pF
—
30
—
V/μs
5V
SLEWC0[1:0]=11B
0.5V to 4.5V, CLOAD=1000pF
—
15
—
V/μs
5V
SLEWC0[1:0]=00B
4.5V to 0.5V, CLOAD = 1000pF
200
—
—
V/μs
5V
SLEWC0[1:0]=01B
4.5V to 0.5V, CLOAD=1000pF
—
60
—
V/μs
5V
SLEWC0[1:0]=10B
4.5V to 0.5V, CLOAD=1000pF
—
30
—
V/μs
5V
SLEWC0[1:0]=11B
4.5V to 0.5V, CLOAD=1000pF
—
15
—
V/μs
5V
3V
5V
VOL=0.2VDD
VOH=0.8VDD
LVD & LVR Electrical Characteristics
Ta=25°C
Symbol
VLVR
VLVD
ILVR
ILVD
Parameter
Low Voltage Reset Voltage
Low Voltage Detector Voltage
Additional Current for LVR Enable
Additional Current for LVD Enable
Test Conditions
VDD
—
Conditions
Min. Typ. Max. Unit
LVR enable, 2.1V
2.1
LVR enable, 2.55V
2.55
LVR enable, 3.15V
-5%
V
3.15
+5%
V
V
LVR enable, 3.8V
3.8
V
—
LVDEN=1, VLVD=2.0V
2.0
V
—
LVDEN=1, VLVD=2.2V
2.2
V
—
LVDEN=1, VLVD=2.4V
2.4
V
—
LVDEN=1, VLVD=2.7V
2.7
—
LVDEN=1, VLVD=3.0V
—
LVDEN=1, VLVD=3.3V
3.3
V
—
LVDEN=1, VLVD=3.6V
3.6
V
—
LVDEN=1, VLVD=4.0V
4.0
-5%
+5%
3.0
V
V
V
5V±3% LVR Disable → LVR Enable
─
60
90
μA
LVD Disable → LVD Enable
(LVR Disabled)
─
75
115
μA
LVD Disable → LVD Enable
(LVR Enabled)
─
60
90
μA
5V±3%
tLVR
LVR Minimum Low Voltage Width
to Reset
—
—
120
240
480
μs
tLVD
LVD Minimum Low Voltage Width
to Interrupt
—
—
60
120
240
μs
Rev. 1.00
14
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Symbol
Test Conditions
Parameter
tLVDS
LVDO Stable Time
tSRESET
Software Reset Width to Reset
VDD
Conditions
Min. Typ. Max. Unit
—
For LVR enable, LVD off → on
—
—
15
μs
—
For LVR disable, LVD off → on
—
—
150
μs
—
—
45
90
120
μs
Note: VLVR or VLVD is the MCU operating voltage level under which a LVR reset or LVD interrupt occurs.
Over Current/Voltage Protection Electrical Characteristics
Ta=25°C
Symbol
IOCVP
VOS_CMP
VHYS
VCM_CMP
VOS_OPA
VCM_OPA
VOR
Rev. 1.00
Parameter
Operating Current
Comparator Input Offset
Voltage
Hysteresis
Comparator Common Mode
Voltage Range
OPA Input Offset Voltage
OPA Common Mode Voltage
Range
OPA Maximum Output Voltage
Range
Test Conditions
VDD
3V
Conditions
Min.
Typ.
Max. Unit
—
—
1250
μA
—
730
1250
μA
3V
Without calibration
(OCVPCOF[4:0]=10000B)
-15
—
15
mV
5V
Without calibration
(OCVPCOF[4:0]=10000B)
-15
—
15
mV
3V
With calibration
-4
—
4
mV
5V
With calibration
-4
—
4
mV
60
mV
5V
DAC VREF=2.5V
3V
—
20
40
5V
—
20
40
60
mV
V
3V
—
VSS
—
VDD
- 1.4
5V
—
VSS
—
VDD
- 1.4
V
3V
Without calibration
(OCVPOOF[5:0]=100000B)
-15
—
15
mV
5V
Without calibration
(OCVPOOF[5:0]=100000B)
-15
—
15
mV
3V
With calibration
-4
—
4
mV
5V
With calibration
-4
—
4
mV
V
3V
—
VSS
—
VDD
- 1.4
5V
—
VSS
—
VDD
- 1.4
V
3V
—
VSS
+ 0.1
—
VDD
- 0.1
V
5V
—
VSS
+ 0.1
—
VDD
- 0.1
V
15
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Symbol
Ga
Parameter
PGA Gain Accuracy
DNL
Differential Non-linearity
INL
Integral Non-linearity
Test Conditions
Min.
Typ.
In non-inverting mode, R2/R1 ≤ 50,
using internal resistor, and input
voltage > 80mV
-5
—
5
%
In non-inverting mode, R2/R1=65
or 80 , using internal resistor, and
input voltage > 50mV
-8
—
8
%
In non-inverting mode, R2/R1= 130,
using internal resistor, and input
voltage > 35mV
-10
—
10
%
In inverting mode, R2/R1 ≤ 50,
using internal resistor, and
-300mV < input voltage < -80mV
-5
—
5
%
In inverting mode, R2/R1=65 or 80,
using internal resistor, and
-300mV < input voltage < -50mV
-8
—
8
%
In inverting mode, R2/R1= 130,
using internal resistor, and
-300mV < input voltage < -35mV
-10
—
10
%
3V
DAC VREF=VDD
—
—
±2
LSB
5V
DAC VREF=VDD
—
—
±1
LSB
3V
DAC VREF=VDD
—
—
±2
LSB
5V
DAC VREF=VDD
—
—
±1.5
LSB
VDD
3V/
5V
Conditions
Max. Unit
Power on Reset Electrical Characteristics
Ta=25°C
Symbol
Test Conditions
Parameter
VDD
Conditions
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
VPOR
VDD Start Voltage to Ensure Power-on Reset
—
—
—
—
100
mV
RRPOR
VDD Rising Rate to Ensure Power-on Reset
—
—
0.035
—
—
V/ms
tPOR
Minimum Time for VDD Stays at VPOR to
Ensure Power-on Reset
—
—
1
—
—
ms
VDD
tPOR
RRPOR
VPOR
Rev. 1.00
16
Time
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
System Architecture
A key factor in the high-performance features of the Holtek range of microcontrollers is attributed
to their internal system architecture. The device takes advantage of the usual features found within
RISC microcontrollers providing increased speed of operation and Periodic performance. The
pipelining scheme is implemented in such a way that instruction fetching and instruction execution
are overlapped, hence instructions are effectively executed in one cycle, with the exception of branch
or call instructions. An 8-bit wide ALU is used in practically all instruction set operations, which
carries out arithmetic operations, logic operations, rotation, increment, decrement, branch decisions,
etc. The internal data path is simplified by moving data through the Accumulator and the ALU.
Certain internal registers are implemented in the Data Memory and can be directly or indirectly
addressed. The simple addressing methods of these registers along with additional architectural
features ensure that a minimum of external components is required to provide a functional I/O
control system with maximum reliability and flexibility. This makes the device suitable for low-cost,
high-volume production for controller applications.
Clocking and Pipelining
The main system clock, derived from either an HIRC or LIRC oscillator is subdivided into four
internally generated non-overlapping clocks, T1~T4. The Program Counter is incremented at the
beginning of the T1 clock during which time a new instruction is fetched. The remaining T2~T4
clocks carry out the decoding and execution functions. In this way, one T1~T4 clock cycle forms
one instruction cycle. Although the fetching and execution of instructions takes place in consecutive
instruction cycles, the pipelining structure of the microcontroller ensures that instructions are
effectively executed in one instruction cycle. The exception to this are instructions where the
contents of the Program Counter are changed, such as subroutine calls or jumps, in which case the
instruction will take one more instruction cycle to execute.
   
 
  
System Clock and Pipelining
For instructions involving branches, such as jump or call instructions, two machine cycles are
required to complete instruction execution. An extra cycle is required as the program takes one
cycle to first obtain the actual jump or call address and then another cycle to actually execute the
branch. The requirement for this extra cycle should be taken into account by programmers in timing
sensitive applications.
Rev. 1.00
17
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
  
    
 Instruction Fetching
Program Counter
During program execution, the Program Counter is used to keep track of the address of the
next instruction to be executed. It is automatically incremented by one each time an instruction
is executed except for instructions, such as "JMP" or "CALL" that demand a jump to a nonconsecutive Program Memory address. Only the lower 8 bits, known as the Program Counter Low
Register, are directly addressable by the application program.
When executing instructions requiring jumps to non-consecutive addresses such as a jump
instruction, a subroutine call, interrupt or reset, etc., the microcontroller manages program control
by loading the required address into the Program Counter. For conditional skip instructions, once
the condition has been met, the next instruction, which has already been fetched during the present
instruction execution, is discarded and a dummy cycle takes its place while the correct instruction is
obtained.
Program Counter
Program Counter High byte
PCL Register
PC10~PC8
PCL7~PCL0
The lower byte of the Program Counter, known as the Program Counter Low register or PCL, is
available for program control and is a readable and writeable register. By transferring data directly
into this register, a short program jump can be executed directly, however, as only this low byte
is available for manipulation, the jumps are limited to the present page of memory that is 256
locations. When such program jumps are executed it should also be noted that a dummy cycle
will be inserted. Manipulating the PCL register may cause program branching, so an extra cycle is
needed to pre-fetch.
Rev. 1.00
18
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Stack
This is a special part of the memory which is used to save the contents of the Program Counter
only. The stack is neither part of the data nor part of the program space, and is neither readable nor
writeable. The activated level is indexed by the Stack Pointer, and is neither readable nor writeable.
At a subroutine call or interrupt acknowledge signal, the contents of the Program Counter are pushed
onto the stack. At the end of a subroutine or an interrupt routine, signaled by a return instruction,
RET or RETI, the Program Counter is restored to its previous value from the stack. After a device
reset, the Stack Pointer will point to the top of the stack.
If the stack is full and an enabled interrupt takes place, the interrupt request flag will be recorded
but the acknowledge signal will be inhibited. When the Stack Pointer is decremented, by RET or
RETI, the interrupt will be serviced. This feature prevents stack overflow allowing the programmer
to use the structure more easily. However, when the stack is full, a CALL subroutine instruction can
still be executed which will result in a stack overflow. Precautions should be taken to avoid such
cases which might cause unpredictable program branching. If the stack is overflow, the first Program
Counter save in the stack will be lost.
P ro g ra m
T o p o f S ta c k
B o tto m
S ta c k L e v e l 1
S ta c k L e v e l 2
S ta c k
P o in te r
S ta c k L e v e l 3
o f S ta c k
C o u n te r
P ro g ra m
M e m o ry
S ta c k L e v e l 4
Arithmetic and Logic Unit – ALU
The arithmetic-logic unit or ALU is a critical area of the microcontroller that carries out arithmetic
and logic operations of the instruction set. Connected to the main microcontroller data bus, the ALU
receives related instruction codes and performs the required arithmetic or logical operations after
which the result will be placed in the specified register. As these ALU calculation or operations may
result in carry, borrow or other status changes, the status register will be correspondingly updated to
reflect these changes. The ALU supports the following functions:
• Arithmetic operations: ADD, ADDM, ADC, ADCM, SUB, SUBM, SBC, SBCM, DAA
• Logic operations: AND, OR, XOR, ANDM, ORM, XORM, CPL, CPLA
• Rotation: RRA, RR, RRCA, RRC, RLA, RL, RLCA, RLC
• Increment and Decrement: INCA, INC, DECA, DEC
• Branch decision: JMP, SZ, SZA, SNZ, SIZ, SDZ, SIZA, SDZA, CALL, RET, RETI
Rev. 1.00
19
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Flash Program Memory
The Program Memory is the location where the user code or program is stored. For this device the
Program Memory is Flash type, which means it can be programmed and re-programmed a large
number of times, allowing the user the convenience of code modification on the same device. By
using the appropriate programming tools, this Flash device offers users the flexibility to conveniently
debug and develop their applications while also offering a means of field programming and updating.
Structure
The Program Memory has a capacity of 2K×16 bits. The Program Memory is addressed by the
Program Counter and also contains data, table information and interrupt entries. Table data, which can
be setup in any location within the Program Memory, is addressed by a separate table pointer register.
Special Vectors
Within the Program Memory, certain locations are reserved for the reset and interrupts. The location
000H is reserved for use by the device reset for program initialisation. After a device reset is
initiated, the program will jump to this location and begin execution.
000H
004H
0�4H
7FFH
Reset
Interrupt
Vectors
1� bits
Program Memory Structure
Look-up Table
Any location within the Program Memory can be defined as a look-up table where programmers can
store fixed data. To use the look-up table, the table pointer must first be setup by placing the address
of the look up data to be retrieved in the table pointer register, TBLP and TBHP. These registers
define the total address of the look-up table.
After setting up the table pointer, the table data can be retrieved from the Program Memory using
the "TABRD[m]" or "TABRDL[m]" instructions, respectively. When the instruction is executed,
the lower order table byte from the Program Memory will be transferred to the user defined
Data Memory register [m] as specified in the instruction. The higher order table data byte from
the Program Memory will be transferred to the TBLH special register. Any unused bits in this
transferred higher order byte will be read as "0".
The accompanying diagram illustrates the addressing data flow of the look-up table.
A d d re s s
L a s t p a g e o r
T B H P R e g is te r
T B L P R e g is te r
Rev. 1.00
D a ta
1 6 b its
R e g is te r T B L H
U s e r S e le c te d
R e g is te r
H ig h B y te
L o w B y te
20
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Table Program Example
The following example shows how the table pointer and table data is defined and retrieved from the
microcontroller. This example uses raw table data located in the Program Memory which is stored
there using the ORG statement. The value at this ORG statement is "700H" which refers to the start
address of the last page within the 2K words Program Memory of the device. The table pointer is
setup here to have an initial value of "06H". This will ensure that the first data read from the data
table will be at the Program Memory address "706H" or 6 locations after the start of the TBHP
specified page. Note that the value for the table pointer is referenced to the first address specified by
the TBHP and TBLP registers if the "TABRD [m]" instruction is being used. The high byte of the
table data which in this case is equal to zero will be transferred to the TBLH register automatically
when the "TABRD [m]" instruction is executed.
Because the TBLH register is a read-only register and cannot be restored, care should be taken
to ensure its protection if both the main routine and Interrupt Service Routine use table read
instructions. If using the table read instructions, the Interrupt Service Routines may change the
value of the TBLH and subsequently cause errors if used again by the main routine. As a rule it is
recommended that simultaneous use of the table read instructions should be avoided. However, in
situations where simultaneous use cannot be avoided, the interrupts should be disabled prior to the
execution of any main routine table-read instructions. Note that all table related instructions require
two instruction cycles to complete their operation.
Table Read Program Example
tempreg1 db ? ; temporary register #1
tempreg2 db ? ; temporary register #2
:
:
mov a,06h ; initialise low table pointer - note that this address is referenced
mov tblp,a ; to the last page or specific page
mov a,07h ; initialise high table pointer
mov tbhp,a
:
:
tabrd tempreg1 ; transfers value in table referenced by table pointer
; data at program memory address "706H" transferred to tempreg1 and TBLH
dec tblp ; reduce value of table pointer by one
tabrd tempreg2 ; transfers value in table referenced by table pointer
; data at program memory address "705H" transferred to tempreg2 and TBLH
; in this example the data "1AH" is transferred to tempreg1 and data "0FH"
; to register tempreg2, the value 00H will be transferred to the high
; byte register TBLH
:
:
org 700h; sets initial address of program memory
dc 00Ah, 00Bh, 00Ch, 00Dh, 00Eh, 00Fh, 01Ah, 01Bh
:
:
Rev. 1.00
21
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
In Circuit Programming
The provision of Flash type Program Memory provides the user with a means of convenient and easy
upgrades and modifications to their programs on the same device. As an additional convenience,
Holtek has provided a means of programming the microcontroller in-circuit using a 4-pin interface.
This provides manufacturers with the possibility of manufacturing their circuit boards complete with
a programmed or un-programmed microcontroller, and then programming or upgrading the program
at a later stage. This enables product manufacturers to easily keep their manufactured products
supplied with the latest program releases without removal and re-insertion of the device.
The Holtek Flash MCU to Writer Programming Pin correspondence table is as follows:
Holtek Write Pins
MCU Programming Pins
ICPDA
PA0
Programming Serial Data/Address
Function
ICPCK
PA2
Programming Clock
VDD
VDD
Power Supply
VSS
VSS
Ground
The Program Memory and EEPROM data memory can both be programmed serially in-circuit using
this 4-wire interface. Data is downloaded and uploaded serially on a single pin with an additional
line for the clock. Two additional lines are required for the power supply. The technical details
regarding the in-circuit programming of the device are beyond the scope of this document and will
be supplied in supplementary literature.
During the programming process, the user must take care of the ICPDA and ICPCK pins for data
and clock programming purpose to ensure that no other outputs are connected to these two pins.
W r ite r C o n n e c to r
S ig n a ls
M C U
P r o g r a m m in g
P in s
V D D
W r ite r _ V D D
P A 0
IC P D A
IC P C K
P A 2
W r ite r _ V S S
V S S
*
*
T o o th e r C ir c u it
Note: * may be resistor or capacitor. The resistance of * must be greater than 1kΩ or the capacitance
of * must be less than 1nF.
On-Chip Debug Support – OCDS
The device has an EV chip named HT45V3830 which is used to emulate the HT45F3830 device.
This EV chip device also provides an "On-Chip Debug" function to debug the real MCU device
during the development process. The EV chip and the real MCU device are almost functionally
compatible except for the "On-Chip Debug" function. Users can use the EV chip device to emulate
the real chip device behavior by connecting the OCDSDA and OCDSCK pins to the Holtek HTIDE development tools. The OCDSDA pin is the OCDS Data/Address input/output pin while the
OCDSCK pin is the OCDS clock input pin. When users use the EV chip for debugging, other
Rev. 1.00
22
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
functions which are shared with the OCDSDA and OCDSCK pins in the device will have no effect
in the EV chip. However, the two OCDS pins which are pin-shared with the ICP programming pins
are still used as the Flash Memory programming pins for ICP. For more detailed OCDS information,
refer to the corresponding document named "Holtek e-Link for 8-bit MCU OCDS User’s Guide".
Holtek e-Link Pins
EV Chip Pins
Pin Description
OCDSDA
OCDSDA
On-chip Debug Support Data/Address input/output
OCDSCK
OCDSCK
On-chip Debug Support Clock input
VDD
VDD
Power Supply
GND
VSS
Ground
RAM Data Memory
The Data Memory is a volatile area of 8-bit wide RAM internal memory and is the location where
temporary information is stored.
Structure
Divided into two sections, the first of these is an area of RAM, known as the Special Purpose Data
Memory. Here are located registers which are necessary for correct operation of the device. Many
of these registers can be read from and written to directly under program control, however, some
remain protected from user manipulation. The second area of Data Memory is known as the General
Purpose Data Memory, which is reserved for general purpose use. All locations within this area are
read and write accessible under program control.
The overall Data Memory is subdivided into two banks. The Special Purpose Data Memory registers are
accessible in all banks, with the exception of the EEC register at address 40H, which is only accessible
in Bank 1. Switching between the different Data Memory banks is achieved by setting the Bank Pointer
to the correct value. The start address of the Data Memory for the device is the address 00H.
Special Purpose Data Memory
General Purpose Data Memory
Address
Capacity
Address
Bank 0: 00H~7FH
Bank 1: 00H~7FH
128×8
Bank 0: 80H~FFH
00H
EEC
Special Purpose
Data �emor�
Bank 1
7FH
80H
General Purpose
Data �emor�
FFH
Bank 0
Data Memory Structure
Rev. 1.00
23
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
General Purpose Data Memory
All microcontroller programs require an area of read/write memory where temporary data can be
stored and retrieved for use later. It is this area of RAM memory that is known as General Purpose
Data Memory. This area of Data Memory is fully accessible by the user programing for both reading
and writing operations. By using the bit operation instructions individual bits can be set or reset under
program control giving the user a large range of flexibility for bit manipulation in the Data Memory.
Special Purpose Data Memory
This area of Data Memory is where registers, necessary for the correct operation of the
microcontroller, are stored. Most of the registers are both readable and writeable but some are
protected and are readable only, the details of which are located under the relevant Special Function
Register section. Note that for locations that are unused, any read instruction to these addresses will
return the value "00H".
Bank 0� 1
00H
Bank 0
IAR0
�5H
Bank 1
Unused
01H
�P0
��H
PC
0�H
IAR1
�7H
PCC
0�H
�P1
�8H
PCPU
04H
BP
�9H
CTRL�
05H
ACC
�AH
CTRL�
0�H
PCL
�BH
CTRL4
07H
TBLP
�CH
CTRL5
08H
TBLH
�DH
PB
09H
TBHP
�EH
PBC
0AH
STATUS
�FH
0BH
S�OD
40H
0CH
LVDC
41H
0DH
INTEG
4�H
0EH
INTC0
4�H
SLEWC0
0FH
INTC1
44H
SLEDC0
10H
INTC�
45H
SLEDC1
11H
�FI0
4�H
PT�0C0
1�H
�FI1
47H
PT�0C1
1�H
�FI�
48H
PT�0DL
14H
PA
49H
PT�0DH
PBPU
Unused
EEC
Unused
15H
PAC
4AH
PT�0AL
1�H
PAPU
4BH
PT�0AH
17H
PAWU
4CH
PT�0RPL
18H
�FI�
4DH
PT�0RPH
PT�1C0
19H
Unused
4EH
1AH
WDTC
4FH
PT�1C1
1BH
TBC
50H
PT�1DL
1CH
Unused
51H
PT�1DH
1DH
Unused
5�H
1EH
EEA
5�H
PT�1AH
1FH
EED
54H
PT�1RPL
55H
PT�1RPH
�0H
�1H
��H
Unused
��H
PT�1AL
5�H
IICC0
57H
IICC1
58H
IICD
�4H
FADJL
59H
IICA
�5H
FADJH
5AH
IICTOC
��H
CTRL
5BH
OCVPC0
�7H
LVRC
5CH
OCVPC1
�8H
CT�C0
5DH
OCVPC�
�9H
CT�C1
5EH
OCVPDA
�AH
CT�DL
5FH
OCVPOCAL
�BH
CT�DH
�0H
OCVPCCAL
�CH
CT�AL
�1H
SCO�C
�DH
CT�AH
��H
�EH
Unused
�FH
ST�C0
�0H
ST�C1
�1H
ST�DL
��H
ST�DH
��H
ST�AL
�4H
ST�AH
Unused
7FH
: Unused� read as 00H
Special Purpose Data Memory Structure
Rev. 1.00
24
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Special Function Register Description
Most of the Special Function Register details will be described in the relevant functional section.
However, several registers require a separate description in this section.
Indirect Addressing Registers – IAR0, IAR1
The Indirect Addressing Registers, IAR0 and IAR1, although having their locations in normal RAM
register space, do not actually physically exist as normal registers. The method of indirect addressing
for RAM data manipulation uses these Indirect Addressing Registers and Memory Pointers, in
contrast to direct memory addressing, where the actual memory address is specified. Actions on the
IAR0 and IAR1 registers will result in no actual read or write operation to these registers but rather
to the memory location specified by their corresponding Memory Pointers, MP0 or MP1. Acting as a
pair, IAR0 and MP0 can together access data from Bank 0 while the IAR1 and MP1 register pair can
access data from any bank. As the Indirect Addressing Registers are not physically implemented,
reading the Indirect Addressing Registers indirectly will return a result of "00H" and writing to the
registers indirectly will result in no operation.
Memory Pointers – MP0, MP1
Two Memory Pointers, known as MP0 and MP1 are provided. These Memory Pointers are
physically implemented in the Data Memory and can be manipulated in the same way as normal
registers providing a convenient way with which to address and track data. When any operation to
the relevant Indirect Addressing Registers is carried out, the actual address that the microcontroller
is directed to is the address specified by the related Memory Pointer. MP0, together with Indirect
Addressing Register, IAR0, are used to access data from Bank 0, while MP1 and IAR1 are used to
access data from all banks according to BP register. Direct Addressing can only be used within Bank
0, all other Banks must be addressed indirectly using MP1 and IAR1.
The following example shows how to clear a section of four Data Memory locations already defined
as locations adres1 to adres4.
Indirect Addressing Program Example
data .section ´data´
adres1 db ?
adres2 db ?
adres3 db ?
adres4 db ?
block db ?
code .section at 0 ´code´
org 00h
start:
mov a,04h ; setup size of block
mov block,a
mov a,offset adres1 ; Accumulator loaded with first RAM address
mov mp0,a ; setup memory pointer with first RAM address
loop:
clr IAR0 ; clear the data at address defined by mp0
inc mp0; increment memory pointer
sdz block ; check if last memory location has been cleared
jmp loop
continue:
The important point to note here is that in the example shown above, no reference is made to specific
Data Memory addresses.
Rev. 1.00
25
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Bank Pointer – BP
For this device, the Data Memory is divided into two banks, Bank0 and Bank1. Selecting the
required Data Memory area is achieved using the Bank Pointer. Bit 0 of the Bank Pointer is used to
select Data Memory Bank 0 or 1.
The Data Memory is initialised to Bank 0 after a reset, except for a WDT time-out reset in the Power
down Mode, in which case, the Data Memory bank remains unaffected. It should be noted that the
Special Purpose Data Memory is not affected by the bank selection, which means that the Special
Function Registers can be accessed from within any bank. Directly addressing the Data Memory
will always result in Bank 0 being accessed irrespective of the value of the Bank Pointer. Accessing
data from Bank1 must be implemented using Indirect Addressing.
BP Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
DMBP0
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
R/W
POR
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
Bit 7 ~ 1
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 0DMBP0: Select Data Memory Banks
0: Bank 0
1: Bank 1
Accumulator – ACC
The Accumulator is central to the operation of any microcontroller and is closely related with
operations carried out by the ALU. The Accumulator is the place where all intermediate results
from the ALU are stored. Without the Accumulator it would be necessary to write the result of
each calculation or logical operation such as addition, subtraction, shift, etc., to the Data Memory
resulting in higher programming and timing overheads. Data transfer operations usually involve
the temporary storage function of the Accumulator; for example, when transferring data between
one user-defined register and another, it is necessary to do this by passing the data through the
Accumulator as no direct transfer between two registers is permitted.
Program Counter Low Register – PCL
To provide additional program control functions, the low byte of the Program Counter is made
accessible to programmers by locating it within the Special Purpose area of the Data Memory. By
manipulating this register, direct jumps to other program locations are easily implemented. Loading
a value directly into this PCL register will cause a jump to the specified Program Memory location,
however, as the register is only 8-bit wide, only jumps within the current Program Memory page are
permitted. When such operations are used, note that a dummy cycle will be inserted.
Rev. 1.00
26
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Look-up Table Registers – TBLP, TBHP, TBLH
These three special function registers are used to control operation of the look-up table which is
stored in the Program Memory. TBLP and TBHP are the table pointers and indicate the location
where the table data is located. Their value must be setup before any table read commands are
executed. Their value can be changed, for example using the "INC" or "DEC" instruction, allowing
for easy table data pointing and reading. TBLH is the location where the high order byte of the table
data is stored after a table read data instruction has been executed. Note that the lower order table
data byte is transferred to a user defined location.
Status Register – STATUS
This 8-bit register contains the zero flag (Z), carry flag (C), auxiliary carry flag (AC), overflow flag
(OV), power down flag (PDF), and watchdog time-out flag (TO). These arithmetic/logical operation
and system management flags are used to record the status and operation of the microcontroller.
With the exception of the TO and PDF flags, bits in the status register can be altered by instructions
like most other registers. Any data written into the status register will not change the TO or PDF flag.
In addition, operations related to the status register may give different results due to the different
instruction operations. The TO flag can be affected only by a system power-up, a WDT time-out or
by executing the "CLR WDT" or "HALT" instruction. The PDF flag is affected only by executing
the "HALT" or "CLR WDT" instruction or during a system power-up.
The Z, OV, AC and C flags generally reflect the status of the latest operations.
• C is set if an operation results in a carry during an addition operation or if a borrow does not take
place during a subtraction operation; otherwise C is cleared. C is also affected by a rotate through
carry instruction.
• AC is set if an operation results in a carry out of the low nibbles in addition, or no borrow from
the high nibble into the low nibble in subtraction; otherwise AC is cleared.
• Z is set if the result of an arithmetic or logical operation is zero; otherwise Z is cleared.
• OV is set if an operation results in a carry into the highest-order bit but not a carry out of the
highest-order bit, or vice versa; otherwise OV is cleared.
• PDF is cleared by a system power-up or executing the "CLR WDT" instruction. PDF is set by
executing the "HALT" instruction.
• TO is cleared by a system power-up or executing the "CLR WDT" or "HALT" instruction. TO is
set by a WDT time-out.
In addition, on entering an interrupt sequence or executing a subroutine call, the status register will
not be pushed onto the stack automatically. If the contents of the status registers are important and if
the subroutine can corrupt the status register, precautions must be taken to correctly save it.
Rev. 1.00
27
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
STATUS Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
TO
PDF
OV
Z
AC
C
R/W
—
—
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
0
0
x
x
x
x
"x" unknown
Bit 7~6
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 5TO: Watchdog Time-out flag
0: After power up or executing the "CLR WDT" or "HALT" instruction
1: A watchdog time-out occurred.
Bit 4PDF: Power down flag
0: After power up or executing the "CLR WDT" instruction
1: By executing the "HALT" instruction
Bit 3OV: Overflow flag
0: No overflow
1: An operation results in a carry into the highest-order bit but not a carry out of the
highest-order bit or vice versa.
Bit 2Z: Zero flag
0: The result of an arithmetic or logical operation is not zero
1: The result of an arithmetic or logical operation is zero
Bit 1AC: Auxiliary flag
0: No auxiliary carry
1: An operation results in a carry out of the low nibbles in addition, or no borrow
from the high nibble into the low nibble in subtraction
Bit 0C: Carry flag
0: No carry-out
1: An operation results in a carry during an addition operation or if a borrow does
not take place during a subtraction operation
C is also affected by a rotate through carry instruction.
Rev. 1.00
28
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
EEPROM Data Memory
One of the special features in the device is its internal EEPROM Data Memory. EEPROM, which
stands for Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory, is by its nature a non-volatile
form of memory, with data retention even when its power supply is removed. By incorporating
this kind of data memory, a whole new host of application possibilities are made available to the
designer. The availability of EEPROM storage allows information such as product identification
numbers, calibration values, specific user data, system setup data or other product information to
be stored directly within the product microcontroller. The process of reading and writing data to the
EEPROM memory has been reduced to a very trivial affair.
EEPROM Data Memory Structure
The EEPROM Data Memory capacity is up to 64×8 bits. Unlike the Program Memory and RAM
Data Memory, the EEPROM Data Memory is not directly mapped and is therefore not directly
accessible in the same way as the other types of memory. Read and Write operations to the
EEPROM are carried out in single byte operations using an address and data register in Bank 0 and
a single control register in Bank 1.
EEPROM Registers
Three registers control the overall operation of the internal EEPROM Data Memory. These are the
address register, EEA, the data register, EED and a single control register, EEC. As both the EEA
and EED registers are located in Bank 0, they can be directly accessed in the same way as any other
Special Function Register. The EEC register however, being located in Bank 1, cannot be directly
addressed directly and can only be read from or written to indirectly using the MP1 Memory Pointer
and Indirect Addressing Register, IAR1. Because the EEC control register is located at address 40H
in Bank 1, the MP1 Memory Pointer must first be set to the value 40H and the Bank Pointer register,
BP, set to the value, 01H, before any operations on the EEC register are executed.
Bit
Register
Name
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
EEA
—
—
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
EED
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
EEC
—
—
—
—
WREN
WR
RDEN
RD
EEPROM Control Register List
EEA Register
Rev. 1.00
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
­—
­—
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
­—
­—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
­—
­—
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7 ~ 6
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 5 ~ 0
Data EEPROM address
Data EEPROM address bit 5 ~ bit 0
29
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
EED Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7 ~ 0
Data EEPROM data
Data EEPROM data bit 7 ~ bit 0
EEC Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
­—
­—
­—
­—
WREN
WR
RDEN
RD
R/W
­—
­—
­—
­—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
­—
­—
­—
­—
0
0
0
0
Bit 7 ~ 4
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 3WREN: Data EEPROM Write Enable
0: Disable
1: Enable
This is the Data EEPROM Write Enable Bit which must be set high before Data
EEPROM write operations are carried out. Clearing this bit to zero will inhibit Data
EEPROM write operations.
Bit 2WR: EEPROM Write Control
0: Write cycle has finished
1: Activate a write cycle
This is the Data EEPROM Write Control Bit and when set high by the application
program will activate a write cycle. This bit will be automatically reset to zero by the
hardware after the write cycle has finished. Setting this bit high will have no effect if
the WREN has not first been set high.
Bit 1RDEN: Data EEPROM Read Enable
0: Disable
1: Enable
This is the Data EEPROM Read Enable Bit which must be set high before Data
EEPROM read operations are carried out. Clearing this bit to zero will inhibit Data
EEPROM read operations.
Bit 0RD: EEPROM Read Control
0: Read cycle has finished
1: Activate a read cycle
This is the Data EEPROM Read Control Bit and when set high by the application
program will activate a read cycle. This bit will be automatically reset to zero by the
hardware after the read cycle has finished. Setting this bit high will have no effect if
the RDEN has not first been set high.
Note: The WREN, WR, RDEN and RD cannot be set to "1" at the same time in one instruction. The
WR and RD cannot be set to "1" at the same time.
Rev. 1.00
30
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Reading Data from the EEPROM
To read data from the EEPROM, the read enable bit, RDEN, in the EEC register must first be set
high to enable the read function. The EEPROM address of the data to be read must then be placed
in the EEA register. If the RD bit in the EEC register is now set high, a read cycle will be initiated.
Setting the RD bit high will not initiate a read operation if the RDEN bit has not been set. When
the read cycle terminates, the RD bit will be automatically cleared to zero, after which the data can
be read from the EED register. The data will remain in the EED register until another read or write
operation is executed. The application program can poll the RD bit to determine when the data is
valid for reading.
Writing Data to the EEPROM
The EEPROM address of the data to be written must first be placed in the EEA register and the data
placed in the EED register. To write data to the EEPROM, the write enable bit, WREN, in the EEC
register must first be set high to enable the write function. After this, the WR bit in the EEC register
must be immediately set high to initiate a write cycle. These two instructions must be executed
consecutively. The global interrupt bit EMI should also first be cleared before implementing any
write operations, and then set again after the write cycle has started. Note that setting the WR bit
high will not initiate a write cycle if the WREN bit has not been set. As the EEPROM write cycle is
controlled using an internal timer whose operation is asynchronous to microcontroller system clock,
a certain time will elapse before the data will have been written into the EEPROM. Detecting when
the write cycle has finished can be implemented either by polling the WR bit in the EEC register or
by using the EEPROM interrupt. When the write cycle terminates, the WR bit will be automatically
cleared to zero by the microcontroller, informing the user that the data has been written to the
EEPROM. The application program can therefore poll the WR bit to determine when the write cycle
has ended.
Write Protection
Protection against inadvertent write operation is provided in several ways. After the device is
powered on, the Write enable bit in the control register will be cleared preventing any write
operations. Also at power-on the Bank Pointer, BP, will be reset to zero, which means that Data
Memory Bank 0 will be selected. As the EEPROM control register is located in Bank 1, this adds a
further measure of protection against spurious write operations. During normal program operation,
ensuring that the Write Enable bit in the control register is cleared will safeguard against incorrect
write operations.
EEPROM Interrupt
The EEPROM write interrupt is generated when an EEPROM write cycle has ended. The EEPROM
interrupt must first be enabled by setting the DEE bit in the relevant interrupt register. However as
the EEPROM is contained within a Multi-function Interrupt, the associated multi-function interrupt
enable bit must also be set. When an EEPROM write cycle ends, the DEF request flag and its
associated multi-function interrupt request flag will both be set. If the global, EEPROM and Multifunction interrupts are enabled and the stack is not full, a jump to the associated Multi-function
Interrupt vector will take place. When the interrupt is serviced only the Multi-function interrupt flag
will be automatically reset, the EEPROM interrupt flag must be manually reset by the application
program. More details can be obtained in the Interrupt section.
Rev. 1.00
31
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Programming Considerations
Care must be taken that data is not inadvertently written to the EEPROM. Protection can be
Periodic by ensuring that the Write Enable bit is normally cleared to zero when not writing. Also
the Bank Pointer could be normally cleared to zero as this would inhibit access to Bank 1 where
the EEPROM control register exist. Although certainly not necessary, consideration might be given
in the application program to the checking of the validity of new write data by a simple read back
process. When writing data the WR bit must be set high immediately after the WREN bit has been
set high, to ensure the write cycle executes correctly. The global interrupt bit EMI should also be
cleared before a write cycle is executed and then re-enabled after the write cycle starts. Note that
the device should not enter the IDLE or SLEEP mode until the EEPROM read or write operation is
totally completed, otherwise, the EEPROM read or write operation will fail.
Programming Examples
• Reading data from the EEPROM – polling method
MOV A, EEPROM_ADRES MOV EEA, A
MOV A, 040H
MOV MP1, A
MOV A, 01H
MOV BP, A
SET IAR1.1
SET IAR1.0
BACK:
SZ IAR1.0
JMP BACK
CLR IAR1
CLR BP
MOV A, EED
MOV READ_DATA, A
; user defined address
; setup memory pointer MP1
; MP1 points to EEC register
; setup Bank Pointer
; set RDEN bit, enable read operations
; start Read Cycle - set RD bit
; check for read cycle end
; disable EEPROM write
; move read data to register
• Writing Data to the EEPROM – polling method
MOV A, EEPROM_ADRES
MOV EEA, A
MOV A, EEPROM_DATA
MOV EED, A
MOV A, 040H
MOV MP1, A
MOV A, 01H
MOV BP, A
CLR EMI
SET IAR1.3
SET IAR1.2
SET EMI
BACK:
SZ IAR1.2
JMP BACK
CLR IAR1
CLR BP
Rev. 1.00
; user defined address
; user defined data
;
;
;
;
setup memory pointer MP1
MP1 points to EEC register
setup Bank Pointer
BP points to data memory bank 1
; set WREN bit, enable write operations
; start Write Cycle - set WR bit — executed immediately
; after set WREN bit
; check for write cycle end
; disable EEPROM write
32
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Oscillators
Various oscillator options offer the user a wide range of functions according to their various
application requirements. The flexible features of the oscillator functions ensure that the best
optimisation can be achieved in terms of speed and power saving. Oscillator selections and operation
are selected through registers.
Oscillator Overview
In addition to being the source of the main system clock the oscillators also provide clock sources
for the Watchdog Timer and Time Base Interrupts. Fully integrated internal oscillators, requiring
no external components, are provided to form a range of both fast and slow system oscillators. The
higher frequency oscillators provide higher performance but carry with it the disadvantage of higher
power requirements, while the opposite is of course true for the lower frequency oscillators. With
the capability of dynamically switching between fast and slow system clock, the device has the
flexibility to optimize the performance/power ratio, a feature especially important in power sensitive
portable applications.
Type
Name
Freq.
Internal High Speed RC
HIRC
12MHz (adjustable)
Internal Low Speed RC
LIRC
32kHz
Oscillator Types
System Clock Configurations
There are two methods of generating the system clock, a high speed internal RC oscillator and a low
speed internal RC oscillator. Selecting whether the low or high speed oscillator is used as the system
oscillator is implemented using the HLCLK bit and CKS2 ~ CKS0 bits in the SMOD register and as
the system clock can be dynamically selected.
The actual source clock used for the high speed and the low speed oscillators is chosen via registers.
The frequency of the slow speed or high speed system clock is also determined using the HLCLK
bit and CKS2 ~ CKS0 bits in the SMOD register. Note that two oscillator selections must be made
namely one high speed and one low speed system oscillators. It is not possible to choose a nooscillator selection for either the high or low speed oscillator.
fH/�
High Speed Oscillator
HIRC
fH/4
Frequenc�
Adjusting
Circuit
fH
fH/8
Prescaler
fH/1�
fSYS
fH/��
fH/�4
ADJ[8:0] bits
fSUB
LIRC
Low Speed Oscillator
HLCLK� CKS[�:0] bits
System Clock Configurations
Rev. 1.00
33
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Internal RC Oscillator – HIRC
The internal high speed RC oscillator is a fully integrated system oscillator requiring no external
components. The internal RC oscillator has a frequency of 12MHz which can be adjusted by
changing the ADJ[8:0] bits field value. Device trimming during the manufacturing process and
the inclusion of internal frequency compensation circuits are used to ensure that the influence
of the power supply voltage, temperature and process variations on the oscillation frequency are
minimised. Note that if this internal system clock option is selected, it requires no external pins for
its operation.
The ADJ[8:0] bit field in the FADJH and FADJL registers is used to adjust the HIRC oscillation
frequency. The HIRC oscillator is supposed to have a frequency of 12MHz with the default
ADJ[8:0] field value, 100000000B. The greater value the ADJ[8:0] field is written, the lower
frequency the HIRC oscillator has. The HIRC oscillator will have a maximum adjusted frequency
when the ADJ[8:0] field is set to 000000000B. Note that a certain time delay for the HIRC oscillator
stabilization should be allowed when the HIRC oscillation frequency is changed by configuring the
ADJ[8:0] field. The new HIRC frequency cannot be used until the updated frequency is stable.
FADJL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
ADJ7
ADJ6
ADJ5
ADJ4
ADJ3
ADJ2
ADJ1
ADJ0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~0ADJ7~ADJ0: HIRC frequency adjustment control bit 7 ~ bit 0
FADJH Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
­—
­—
­—
­—
­—
­—
­—
ADJ8
R/W
­—
­—
­—
­—
­—
­—
­—
R/W
POR
­—
­—
­—
­—
­—
­—
­—
1
Bit 7~1
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 0ADJ8: HIRC frequency adjustment control bit 8
Internal 32kHz Oscillator – LIRC
The Internal 32kHz system oscillator is the low frequency oscillator. It is a fully integrated RC
oscillator with a typical frequency of 32kHz at 5V, requiring no external components for its
implementation. Device trimming during the manufacturing process and the inclusion of internal
frequency compensation circuits are used to ensure that the influence of the power supply voltage,
temperature and process variations on the oscillation frequency are minimised.
Rev. 1.00
34
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Operating Modes and System Clocks
Present day applications require that their microcontrollers have high performance but often still
demand that they consume as little power as possible, conflicting requirements that are especially
true in battery powered portable applications. The fast clocks required for high performance will
by their nature increase current consumption and of course vice-versa, lower speed clocks reduce
current consumption. As Holtek has provided this device with both high and low speed clock
sources and the means to switch between them dynamically, the user can optimise the operation of
their microcontroller to achieve the best performance/power ratio.
System Clocks
The device has many different clock sources for both the CPU and peripheral function operation.
By providing the user with a wide range of clock options using configuration options and register
programming, a clock system can be configured to obtain maximum application performance.
The main system clock, can come from either a high frequency fH or low frequency fSUB source,
and is selected using the HLCLK bit and CKS2~CKS0 bits in the SMOD register. The high speed
system clock can be sourced from the HIRC oscillator. The low speed system clock source can be
sourced from the LIRC oscillator. The other choice, which is a divided version of the high speed
system oscillator has a range of fH/2~fH/64.
fH/�
High Speed Oscillator
HIRC
fH/4
Frequenc�
Adjusting
Circuit
fH
fH/8
Prescaler
fSYS
fH/��
fH/�4
ADJ[8:0] bits
LIRC
fH/1�
fSUB
HLCLK� CKS[�:0] bits
Low Speed Oscillator
fSUB
To peripherals
fS
fTBC
WDT
fTB
fSYS/4
Time
Base
TBCK
Device Clock Configurations
Note: When the system clock source fSYS is switched to fSUB from fH, the high speed oscillator will
stop to conserve the power. Thus there is no fH~fH/64 for peripheral circuit to use.
Rev. 1.00
35
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
System Operating Modes
There are six different modes of operation for the microcontroller, each one with its own
special characteristics and which can be chosen according to the specific performance and
power requirements of the application. There are two modes allowing normal operation of the
microcontroller, the NORMAL Mode and SLOW Mode. The remaining four modes, the SLEEP0,
SLEEP1, IDLE0 and IDLE1 Mode are used when the microcontroller CPU is switched off to
conserve power.
Operating
Mode
Description
CPU
fSYS
fH
fSUB
NORMAL mode
On
fH~fH/64
On
On
SLOW mode
On
fSUB
Off
On
ILDE0 mode
Off
Off
Off
On
IDLE1 mode
Off
On
On/Off
On
SLEEP0 mode(Note)
Off
Off
Off
Off
SLEEP1mode
Off
Off
Off
On
Note: If the Watchdog Timer configuration option is "Always enabled" which means the fSUB clock
must always be on, there is not SLEEP0 mode.
NORMAL Mode
As the name suggests this is one of the main operating modes where the microcontroller has all of
its functions operational and where the system clock is provided by the high speed oscillator. This
mode operates allowing the microcontroller to operate normally with a clock source will come from
the high speed oscillator, HIRC. The high speed oscillator will however first be divided by a ratio
ranging from 1 to 64, the actual ratio being selected by the CKS2~CKS0 and HLCLK bits in the
SMOD register. Although a high speed oscillator is used, running the microcontroller at a divided
clock ratio reduces the operating current.
SLOW Mode
This is also a mode where the microcontroller operates normally although now with a slower speed
clock source. The clock source used will be from fSUB. Running the microcontroller in this mode
allows it to run with much lower operating currents. In the SLOW Mode, the fH is off.
SLEEP0 Mode
If the WDT configuration option is "Always enabled", there is not SLEEP0 mode. If the WDT
configuration option is "controlled by WDTC register" the MCU can enter the SLEEP0 mode. The
SLEEP Mode is entered when an HALT instruction is executed and when the IDLEN bit in the
SMOD register is low. In the SLEEP0 mode the CPU will be stopped, and the fSUB and fS clocks
will be stopped too, and the Watchdog Timer function is disabled. In this mode, the LVDEN is must
cleared to zero. If the LVDEN is set high, it won’t enter the SLEEP0 Mode.
SLEEP1 Mode
The SLEEP Mode is entered when an HALT instruction is executed and when the IDLEN bit in
the SMOD register is low. In the SLEEP1 mode the CPU will be stopped. However the fSUB and fS
clocks will continue to operate if the LVDEN is "1" or the Watchdog Timer function is enabled.
IDLE0 Mode
The IDLE0 Mode is entered when a HALT instruction is executed and when the IDLEN bit in the
SMOD register is high and the FSYSON bit in the CTRL register is low. In the IDLE0 Mode the
system oscillator will be inhibited from driving the CPU, the system oscillator will be stopped, the
low frequency clock fSUB will be on to drive some peripheral functions.
Rev. 1.00
36
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
IDLE1 Mode
The IDLE1 Mode is entered when a HALT instruction is executed and when the IDLEN bit in the
SMOD register is high and the FSYSON bit in the CTRL register is high. In the IDLE1 Mode the
system oscillator will be inhibited from driving the CPU, the system oscillator will continue to run,
and this system oscillator may be high speed or low speed system oscillator. In the IDLE1 Mode the
low frequency clock fSUB will be on to drive some peripheral functions.
Note: If LVDEN=1 and the SLEEP or IDLE mode is entered, the LVD and bandgap functions will
not be disabled, and the fSUB clock will be forced to be enabled.
Control Registers
The SMOD and CTRL registers are used to control the internal clocks within the device.
SMOD Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
—
LTO
HTO
IDLEN
HLCLK
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
R
R
R/W
R/W
POR
1
1
0
—
0
0
1
0
Bit 7 ~ 5
CKS2 ~ CKS0: The system clock selection when HLCLK is "0"
000: fSUB
001: fSUB
010: fH/64
011: fH/32
100: fH/16
101: fH/8
110: fH/4
111: fH/2
These three bits are used to select which clock is used as the system clock source. In
addition to the system clock source, which can be LIRC, a divided version of the high
speed system oscillator can also be chosen as the system clock source.
Bit 4
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 3LTO: LIRC System OSC SST ready flag
0: Not ready
1: Ready
This is the low speed system oscillator SST ready flag which indicates when the low
speed system oscillator is stable after power on reset or a wake-up has occurred. The
flag will change to a high level after 1~2 cycles.
Bit 2HTO: HIRC System OSC SST ready flag
0: Not ready
1: Ready
This is the high speed system oscillator SST ready flag which indicates when the high
speed system oscillator is stable after a wake-up has occurred. This flag is cleared to
"0" by hardware when the device is powered on and then changes to a high level after
the high speed system oscillator is stable. Therefore this flag will always be read as "1"
by the application program after device power-on. The flag will be low when in the
SLEEP or IDLE0 Mode but after power on reset or a wake-up has occurred, the flag
will change to a high level after 15~16 clock cycles if the HIRC oscillator is used.
Rev. 1.00
37
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Bit 1IDLEN: IDLE Mode Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
This is the IDLE Mode Control bit and determines what happens when the HALT
instruction is executed. If this bit is high, when a HALT instruction is executed the
device will enter the IDLE Mode. In the IDLE1 Mode the CPU will stop running
but the system clock will continue to keep the peripheral functions operational, if
FSYSON bit is high. If FSYSON bit is low, the CPU and the system clock will all stop
in IDLE0 mode. If the bit is low the device will enter the SLEEP Mode when a HALT
instruction is executed.
Bit 0HLCLK: System Clock Selection
0: fH/2 ~ fH/64 or fSUB
1: fH
This bit is used to select if the fH clock or the fH/2 ~ fH/64 or fSUB clock is used as the
system clock. When the bit is high the fH clock will be selected and if low the fH/2 ~
fH/64 or fSUB clock will be selected. When system clock switches from the fH clock to
the fSUB clock and the fH clock will be automatically switched off to conserve power.
CTRL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
FSYSON
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
—
LVRF
LRF
WRF
R/W
R/W
POR
0
—
—
—
—
R/W
x
0
0
"x" unknown
Bit 7
FSYSON: fSYS Control in IDLE Mode
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 6 ~ 3
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 2LVRF: LVR function reset flag
Described elsewhere
Bit 1LRF: LVRC control register software reset flag
Described elsewhere
Bit 0WRF: WDTC control register software reset flag
Described elsewhere
Rev. 1.00
38
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Operating Mode Switching
The device can switch between operating modes dynamically allowing the user to select the best
performance/power ratio for the present task in hand. In this way microcontroller operations that
do not require high performance can be executed using slower clocks thus requiring less operating
current and prolonging battery life in portable applications.
In simple terms, Mode Switching between the NORMAL Mode and SLOW Mode is executed
using the HLCLK bit and CKS2~CKS0 bits in the SMOD register while Mode Switching from the
NORMAL/SLOW Modes to the SLEEP/IDLE Modes is executed via the HALT instruction. When
a HALT instruction is executed, whether the device enters the IDLE Mode or the SLEEP Mode is
determined by the condition of the IDLEN bit in the SMOD register and FSYSON in the CTRL
register.
When the HLCLK bit switches to a low level, which implies that clock source is switched from the
high speed clock source, fH, to the clock source, fH/2~fH/64 or fSUB. If the clock is from the fSUB, the
high speed clock source will stop running to conserve power. When this happens it must be noted
that the fH/16 and fH/64 internal clock sources will also stop running, which may affect the operation
of other internal functions such as the TMs. The accompanying flowchart shows what happens when
the device moves between the various operating modes.
IDLE1
HALT instruction executed
CPU stop
IDLEN=1
FSYSON=1
fSYS on
fSUB on
NORMAL
fSYS=fH~fH/�4
fH on
CPU run
fSYS on
fSUB on
SLEEP0
HALT instruction executed
fSYS off
CPU stop
IDLEN=0
fSUB off
WDT & LVD off
IDLE0
HALT instruction executed
CPU stop
IDLEN=1
FSYSON=0
fSYS off
fSUB on
SLEEP1
HALT instruction executed
fSYS off
CPU stop
IDLEN=0
fSUB on
WDT or LVD on
SLOW
fSYS=fSUB
fSUB on
CPU run
fSYS on
fSUB on
fH off
Note: If the Watchdog Timer configuration option is "Always enabled" which means the fSUB clock
must always be on, there is not SLEEP0 mode.
Rev. 1.00
39
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
NORMAL Mode to SLOW Mode Switching
When running in the NORMAL Mode, which uses the high speed system oscillator, and therefore
consumes more power, the system clock can switch to run in the SLOW Mode by setting the
HLCLK bit to "0" and setting the CKS2~CKS0 bits to "000" or "001" in the SMOD register. This
will then use the low speed system oscillator which will consume less power. Users may decide to
do this for certain operations which do not require high performance and can subsequently reduce
power consumption.
The SLOW Mode is sourced from the LIRC oscillator and therefore requires this oscillator to be
stable before full mode switching occurs. This is monitored using the LTO bit in the SMOD register.
NORMAL Mode
CKS�~CKS0 = 00xB &
HLCLK = 0
SLOW Mode
WDT and LVD are all off
IDLEN = 0
HALT instruction is executed
SLEEP0 Mode
WDT or LVD is on
IDLEN = 0
HALT instruction is executed
SLEEP1 Mode
IDLEN = 1� FSYSON = 0
HALT instruction is executed
IDLE0 Mode
IDLEN = 1� FSYSON = 1
HALT instruction is executed
IDLE1 Mode
Rev. 1.00
40
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
SLOW Mode to NORMAL Mode Switching
In SLOW Mode the system uses LIRC low speed system oscillator. To switch back to the NORMAL
Mode, where the high speed system oscillator is used, the HLCLK bit should be set to "1" or
HLCLK bit is "0", but CKS2~CKS0 is set to "010", "011", "100", "101", "110" or "111". As a certain
amount of time will be required for the high frequency clock to stabilise, the status of the HTO bit
is checked. The amount of time required for high speed system oscillator stabilization depends upon
which high speed system oscillator type is used.
SLOW Mode
CKS�~CKS0 = 000B� 001B as
HLCLK = 0 or HLCLK = 1
NORMAL Mode
WDT and LVD are all off
IDLEN = 0
HALT instruction is executed
SLEEP0 Mode
WDT or LVD is on
IDLEN = 0
HALT instruction is executed
SLEEP1 Mode
IDLEN = 1� FSYSON = 0
HALT instruction is executed
IDLE0 Mode
IDLEN = 1� FSYSON = 1
HALT instruction is executed
IDLE1 Mode
Entering the SLEEP0 Mode
There is only one way for the device to enter the SLEEP0 Mode and that is to execute the "HALT"
instruction in the application program with the IDLEN bit in SMOD register equal to "0" and the
WDT and LVD are both off. When this instruction is executed under the conditions described above,
the following will occur:
• The system clock and the fSUB clock will be stopped and the application program will stop at the
"HALT" instruction.
• The Data Memory contents and registers will maintain their present condition.
• The WDT will be cleared and stopped.
• The I/O ports will maintain their present conditions.
• In the status register, the Power Down flag, PDF, will be set and the Watchdog time-out flag, TO,
will be cleared.
Rev. 1.00
41
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Entering the SLEEP1 Mode
There is only one way for the device to enter the SLEEP1 Mode and that is to execute the "HALT"
instruction in the application program with the IDLEN bit in SMOD register equal to "0" and the
WDT or LVD is on. When this instruction is executed under the conditions described above, the
following will occur:
• The system clock will be stopped and the application program will stop at the "HALT" instruction but the WDT or LVD will remain with the clock source coming with the fSUB clock.
• The Data Memory contents and registers will maintain their present condition.
• The WDT will be cleared and resume counting as the WDT is enabled.
• The I/O ports will maintain their present conditions.
• In the status register, the Power Down flag, PDF, will be set and the Watchdog time-out flag, TO,
will be cleared.
Entering the IDLE0 Mode
There is only one way for the device to enter the IDLE0 Mode and that is to execute the "HALT"
instruction in the application program with the IDLEN bit in SMOD register equal to "1" and the
FSYSON bit in CTRL register equal to "0". When this instruction is executed under the conditions
described above, the following will occur:
• The system clock will be stopped and the application program will stop at the "HALT" instruction, but the low frequency fSUB clock will be on.
• The Data Memory contents and registers will maintain their present condition.
• The WDT will be cleared and resume counting.
• The I/O ports will maintain their present conditions as it is enabled.
• In the status register, the Power Down flag, PDF, will be set and the Watchdog time-out flag, TO,
will be cleared.
Entering the IDLE1 Mode
There is only one way for the device to enter the IDLE1 Mode and that is to execute the "HALT"
instruction in the application program with the IDLEN bit in SMOD register equal to "1" and the
FSYSON bit in CTRL register equal to "1". When this instruction is executed under the conditions
described above, the following will occur:
• The system clock and the low frequency fSUB will be on and the application program will stop at
the "HALT" instruction.
• The Data Memory contents and registers will maintain their present condition.
• The WDT will be cleared and resume counting as it is enabled.
• The I/O ports will maintain their present conditions.
• In the status register, the Power Down flag, PDF, will be set and the Watchdog time-out flag, TO,
will be cleared.
Rev. 1.00
42
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Standby Current Considerations
As the main reason for entering the SLEEP or IDLE Mode is to keep the current consumption of the
device to as low a value as possible, perhaps only in the order of several micro-amps except in the
IDLE1 Mode, there are other considerations which must also be taken into account by the circuit
designer if the power consumption is to be minimised. Special attention must be made to the I/O pins
on the device. All high-impedance input pins must be connected to either a fixed high or low level as
any floating input pins could create internal oscillations and result in increased current consumption.
This also applies to devices which have different package types, as there may be unbonbed pins.
These must either be setup as outputs or if setup as inputs must have pull-high resistors connected.
Care must also be taken with the loads, which are connected to I/O pins, which are setup as
outputs. These should be placed in a condition in which minimum current is drawn or connected
only to external circuits that do not draw current, such as other CMOS inputs. In the IDLE1 Mode
the system oscillator is on, if the system oscillator is from the high speed system oscillator, the
additional standby current will also be perhaps in the order of several hundred micro-amps.
Wake-up
After the system enters the SLEEP or IDLE Mode, it can be woken up from one of various sources
listed as follows:
• An external falling edge on Port A
• A system interrupt
• A WDT overflow
If the device is woken up by a WDT overflow, a Watchdog Timer reset will be initiated. The actual
source of the wake-up can be determined by examining the TO and PDF flags. The PDF flag is
cleared by a system power-up or executing the clear Watchdog Timer instructions and is set when
executing the "HALT" instruction. The TO flag is set if a WDT time-out occurs, and causes a wakeup that only resets the Program Counter and Stack Pointer, the other flags remain in their original
status.
Each pin on Port A can be setup using the PAWU register to permit a negative transition on the pin
to wake-up the system. When a Port A pin wake-up occurs, the program will resume execution at
the instruction following the "HALT" instruction. If the system is woken up by an interrupt, then
two possible situations may occur. The first is where the related interrupt is disabled or the interrupt
is enabled but the stack is full, in which case the program will resume execution at the instruction
following the "HALT" instruction. In this situation, the interrupt which woke-up the device will not
be immediately serviced, but will rather be serviced later when the related interrupt is finally enabled
or when a stack level becomes free. The other situation is where the related interrupt is enabled and
the stack is not full, in which case the regular interrupt response takes place. If an interrupt request
flag is set high before entering the SLEEP or IDLE Mode, the wake-up function of the related
interrupt will be disabled.
Rev. 1.00
43
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Watchdog Timer
The Watchdog Timer is provided to prevent program malfunctions or sequences from jumping to
unknown locations, due to certain uncontrollable external events such as electrical noise.
Watchdog Timer Clock Source
The Watchdog Timer clock source is provided by the internal fS clock which is in turn supplied
by the LIRC oscillator. The Watchdog Timer source clock is then subdivided by a ratio of 28 to
218 to give longer timeouts, the actual value being chosen using the WS2~WS0 bits in the WDTC
register. The LIRC internal oscillator has an approximate period of 32kHz at a supply voltage of 5V.
However, it should be noted that this specified internal clock period can vary with VDD, temperature
and process variations.
Watchdog Timer Control Register
A single register, WDTC, controls the required timeout period as well as the enable/disable
operation. This register together with the configuration option control the overall operation of the
Watchdog Timer.
WDTC Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
WE4
WE3
WE2
WE1
WE0
WS2
WS1
WS0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
Bit 7~3WE4~WE0: WDT function enable/disable control
If the WDT configuration option is "Always enabled":
10101 or 01010: Enable
Others: Reset MCU
If the WDT configuration option is "Controlled by WDTC register":
10101: Disable
01010: Enable
Others: Reset MCU
When these bits are changed by the environmental noise or software setting to reset
the microcontroller, the reset operation will be activated after a delay time, tSRESET and
the WRF bit in the CTRL register will be set high.
Bit 2~0WS2~WS0: WDT time-out period selection
000: 28/fS
001: 210/fS
010: 212/fS
011: 214/fS
100: 215/fS
101: 216/fS
110: 217/fS
111: 218/fS
These three bits determine the division ratio of the Watchdog Timer source clock,
which in turn determines the timeout period.
Rev. 1.00
44
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
CTRL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
FSYSON
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
—
LVRF
LRF
WRF
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
—
—
—
—
x
0
0
"x" unknown
Bit 7FSYSON: fSYS Control in IDLE Mode
Described elsewhere.
Bit 6~3
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 2LVRF: LVR function reset flag
Described elsewhere.
Bit 1LRF: LVRC Control register software reset flag
Described elsewhere.
Bit 0WRF: WDTC Control register software reset flag
0: Not occur
1: Occurred
This bit is set high by the WDT Control register software reset and cleared by the
application program. Note that this bit can only be cleared to zero by the application
program.
Watchdog Timer Operation
The Watchdog Timer operates by providing a device reset when its timer overflows. This means
that in the application program and during normal operation the user has to strategically clear the
Watchdog Timer before it overflows to prevent the Watchdog Timer from executing a reset. This is
done using the clear watchdog instructions. If the program malfunctions for whatever reason, jumps
to an unknown location, or enters an endless loop, these clear instructions will not be executed in
the correct manner, in which case the Watchdog Timer will overflow and reset the device. With
regard to the Watchdog Timer enable/disable function, there are also five bits, WE4~WE0, in the
WDTC register to offer additional enable/disable and reset control of the Watchdog Timer. If the
WDT configuration option is that the WDT function is always enabled, the WE4~WE0 bits still
have effects on the WDT function. When the WE4~WE0 bits value is equal to 01010B or 10101B,
the WDT function is enabled. However, if the WE4~WE0 bits are changed to any other values
except 01010B and 10101B, which is caused by the environmental noise or software setting, it will
reset the microcontroller after a delay time, tSRESET. If the WDT configuration option is that the WDT
function is controlled by the WDTC register, the WE4~WE0 values can determine which mode the
WDT operates in. The WDT function will be disabled when the WE4~WE0 bits are set to a value of
10101B. The WDT function will be enabled if the WE4~WE0 bits value is equal to 01010B. If the
WE4~WE0 bits are set to any other values except 01010B and 10101B by the environmental noise
or software setting, it will reset the device after a delay time, tSRESET. After power on these bits will
have the value of 01010B.
WDT Configuration Option
Always Enabled
WE4 ~ WE0 Bits
WDT Function
01010B or 10101B
Enable
Any other values
Reset MCU
10101B
Disable
Controlled by WDTC Register
01010B
Enable
Any other values
Reset MCU
Watchdog Timer Enable/Disable Control
Rev. 1.00
45
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Under normal program operation, a Watchdog Timer time-out will initialise a device reset and set
the status bit TO. However, if the system is in the SLEEP or IDLE Mode, when a Watchdog Timer
time-out occurs, the TO bit in the status register will be set and only the Program Counter and Stack
Pointer will be reset. Three methods can be adopted to clear the contents of the Watchdog Timer.
The first is a WDT reset, which means a certain value except 01010B and 10101B written into the
WE4~WE0 bit filed, the second is using the Watchdog Timer software clear instructions and the
third is via a HALT instruction.
There is only one method of using software instruction to clear the Watchdog Timer. That is to use
the single "CLR WDT" instruction to clear the WDT.
The maximum time out period is when the 218 division ratio is selected. As an example, with a
32kHz LIRC oscillator as its source clock, this will give a maximum watchdog period of around 8
second for the 218 division ratio, and a minimum timeout of 7.8ms for the 28 division ration.
WDTC Register
WE4~WE0 bits
Reset �CU
CLR
“CLR WDT” Instruction
“HALT” Instruction
LIRC
fS
8-stage Divider
fS/�8
WS�~WS0
WDT Prescaler
WDT Time-out
8-to-1 �UX
Watchdog Timer
Rev. 1.00
46
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Reset and Initialisation
A reset function is a fundamental part of any microcontroller ensuring that the device can be set
to some predetermined condition irrespective of outside parameters. The most important reset
condition is after power is first applied to the microcontroller. In this case, internal circuitry will
ensure that the microcontroller, after a short delay, will be in a well defined state and ready to
execute the first program instruction. After this power-on reset, certain important internal registers
will be set to defined states before the program commences. One of these registers is the Program
Counter, which will be reset to zero forcing the microcontroller to begin program execution from the
lowest Program Memory address.
Another type of reset is when the Watchdog Timer overflows and resets the microcontroller. All
types of reset operations result in different register conditions being setup. Another reset exists in the
form of a Low Voltage Reset, LVR, where a full reset is implemented in situations where the power
supply voltage falls below a certain threshold.
Reset Functions
There are several ways in which a microcontroller reset can occur, through events occurring
internally:
Power-on Reset
The most fundamental and unavoidable reset is the one that occurs after power is first applied to
the microcontroller. As well as ensuring that the Program Memory begins execution from the first
memory address, a power-on reset also ensures that certain other registers are preset to known
conditions. All the I/O port and port control registers will power up in a high condition ensuring that
all pins will be first set to inputs.
VDD
Power-on
Reset
tRSTD
SST Time-out
Power-On Reset Timing Chart
Low Voltage Reset – LVR
The microcontroller contains a low voltage reset circuit in order to monitor the supply voltage of the
device. The LVR function is always enabled with a specific LVR voltage, VLVR. If the supply voltage
of the device drops to within a range of 0.9V~VLVR such as might occur when changing the battery,
the LVR will automatically reset the device internally and the LVRF bit in the CTRL register will
also be set high. For a valid LVR signal, a low voltage, i.e., a voltage in the range between 0.9V~VLVR
must exist for greater than the value tLVR specified in the LVD&LVR characteristics table. If the low
voltage state does not exceed this value, the LVR will ignore the low supply voltage and will not
perform a reset function.
Rev. 1.00
47
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
The actual VLVR is defined by the LVS7~LVS0 bits in the LVRC register. If the LVS7~LVS0 bits
are changed to any other value except some certain values defined in the LVRC register by the
environmental noise, the LVR will reset the device after a delay time, tSRESET. When this happens,
the LRF bit in the CTRL register will be set high. After power on the register will have the value of
01010101B. Note that the LVR function will be automatically disabled when the device enters the
power down mode.
Low Voltage Reset Timing Chart
• LVRC Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
LVS7
LVS6
LVS5
LVS4
LVS3
LVS2
LVS1
LVS0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Bit 7 ~ 0
LVS7 ~ LVS0: LVR Voltage Select control
01010101: 2.1V
00110011: 2.55V
10011001: 3.15V
10101010: 3.8V
Other values: MCU reset – register is reset to POR value
When an actual low voltage condition occurs, an MCU reset will be generated. The
reset operation will be activated after the low voltage condition keeps more than a
tLVR time. In this situation this register contents will remain the same after such a reset
occurs.
Any register value, other than the defined values above, will also result in the
generation of an MCU reset. The reset operation will be activated after a delay time,
tSRESET. However in this situation this register contents will be reset to the POR value.
• CTRL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
FSYSON
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
—
LVRF
LRF
WRF
R/W
R/W
POR
0
—
—
—
—
R/W
x
0
0
"x" unknown
Bit 7
FSYSON: fSYS Control in IDLE Mode
Described elsewhere
Bit 6 ~ 3
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 2LVRF: LVR function reset flag
0: Not occurred
1: Occurred
This bit is set high when a specific low voltage reset situation condition occurs. This
bit can only be cleared to zero by application program.
Bit 1LRF: LVRC control register software reset flag
0: Not occurred
1: Occurred
This bit is set high when the LVRC register contains any undefined LVR voltage
register value. This in effect acts like a software reset function. This bit can only be
cleared to zero by application program.
Bit 0WRF: WDTC control register software reset flag
Described elsewhere
Rev. 1.00
48
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Watchdog Time-out Reset during Normal Operation
The Watchdog time-out Reset during normal operation is the same as a LVR reset except that the
Watchdog time-out flag TO will be set high.
WDT Time-out Reset during Normal Operation Timing Chart
Watchdog Time-out Reset during SLEEP or IDLE Mode
The Watchdog time-out Reset during SLEEP or IDLE Mode is a little different from other kinds
of reset. Most of the conditions remain unchanged except that the Program Counter and the Stack
Pointer will be cleared to zero and the TO flag will be set high. Refer to the A.C. Characteristics for
tSST details.
WDT Time-out Reset during SLEEP or IDLE Timing Chart
Reset Initial Conditions
The different types of reset described affect the reset flags in different ways. These flags, known
as PDF and TO are located in the status register and are controlled by various microcontroller
operations, such as the SLEEP or IDLE Mode function or Watchdog Timer. The reset flags are
shown in the table:
TO
PDF
0
0
Power-on reset
RESET Conditions
u
u
LVR reset during NORMAL or SLOW Mode operation
1
u
WDT time-out reset during NORMAL or SLOW Mode operation
1
1
WDT time-out reset during IDLE or SLEEP Mode operation
Note: "u" stands for unchanged
The following table indicates the way in which the various components of the microcontroller are
affected after a power-on reset occurs.
Item
Rev. 1.00
Condition After RESET
Program Counter
Reset to zero
Interrupts
All interrupts will be disabled
WDT
Clear after reset, WDT begins counting
Timer Modules
Timer Modules will be turned off
Input/Output Ports
I/O ports will be setup as inputs
Stack Pointer
Stack Pointer will point to the top of the stack
49
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
The different kinds of resets all affect the internal registers of the microcontroller in different ways.
To ensure reliable continuation of normal program execution after a reset occurs, it is important to
know what condition the microcontroller is in after a particular reset occurs. The following table
describes how each type of reset affects each of the microcontroller internal registers.
Reset
(Power On)
WDT Time-out
(Normal Operation)
WDT Time-out
(SLEEP/IDLE)
MP0
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
MP1
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
BP
---- ---0
---- ---0
---- ---u
ACC
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
Register
Rev. 1.00
PCL
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
TBLP
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
TBLH
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
TBHP
---- -xxx
---- -uuu
---- -uuu
STATUS
--00 xxxx
--1u uuuu
- - 11 u u u u
SMOD
11 0 - 0 0 1 0
11 0 - 0 0 1 0
uuu- uuuu
LVDC
--00 -000
--00 -000
--uu -uuu
INTEG
---- 0000
---- 0000
---- uuuu
INTC0
-000 0000
-000 0000
-uuu uuuu
INTC1
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
INTC2
--00 --00
--00 --00
--uu --uu
MFI0
--00 --00
--00 --00
--uu --uu
MFI1
--00 --00
--00 --00
--uu --uu
MFI2
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
PA
1111 1111
1111 1111
uuuu uuuu
PAC
1111 1111
1111 1111
uuuu uuuu
PAPU
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
PAWU
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
MFI3
-000 -000
-000 -000
-uuu -uuu
WDTC
0 1 0 1 0 0 11
0 1 0 1 0 0 11
uuuu uuuu
TBC
0 0 11 - 111
0 0 11 - 111
uuuu -uuu
EEA
--00 0000
--00 0000
--uu uuuu
EED
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
EEC
---- 0000
---- 0000
---- uuuu
FADJL
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
FADJH
---- ---1
---- ---1
---- ---u
CTRL
0--- -x00
0--- -000
u--- -uuu
LVRC
0101 0101
0101 0101
uuuu uuuu
CTMC0
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
CTMC1
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
CTMDL
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
CTMDH
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
CTMAL
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
CTMAH
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
STMC0
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
STMC1
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
STMDL
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
STMDH
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
STMAL
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
50
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Reset
(Power On)
Register
WDT Time-out
(Normal Operation)
WDT Time-out
(SLEEP/IDLE)
STMAH
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
PC
- - 11 1111
- - 11 1111
--uu uuuu
PCC
- - 11 1111
- - 11 1111
--uu uuuu
PCPU
--00 0000
--00 0000
--uu uuuu
CTRL2
---- -000
---- -000
---- -uuu
CTRL3
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
CTRL4
--00 0000
--00 0000
--uu uuuu
CTRL5
---- 0000
---- 0000
---- uuuu
PB
1111 1111
1111 1111
uuuu uuuu
PBC
1111 1111
1111 1111
uuuu uuuu
PBPU
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
SLEWC0
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
SLEDC0
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
SLEDC1
---- 0000
---- 0000
---- uuuu
PTM0C0
0000 0---
0000 0---
uuuu u---
PTM0C1
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
PTM0DL
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
PTM0DH
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
PTM0AL
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
PTM0AH
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
PTM0RPL
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
PTM0RPH
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
PTM1C0
0000 0---
0000 0---
uuuu u---
PTM1C1
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
PTM1DL
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
PTM1DH
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
PTM1AL
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
PTM1AH
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
PTM1RPL
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
PTM1RPH
---- --00
---- --00
---- --uu
IICC0
---- 000-
---- 000-
---- uuu-
IICC1
1000 0001
1000 0001
uuuu uuuu
IICD
xxxx xxxx
xxxx xxxx
xxxx xxxx
IICA
0000 000-
0000 000-
uuuu uuu-
IICTOC
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
OCVPC0
11 0 0 1 0 0 0
11 0 0 1 0 0 0
uuuu uuuu
OCVPC1
0000 --00
0000 --00
uuuu --uu
OCVPC2
-000 0000
-000 0000
-uuu uuuu
OCVPDA
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
OCVPOCAL
0010 0000
0010 0000
uuuu uuuu
OCVPCCAL
0001 0000
0001 0000
uuuu uuuu
SCOMC
-000 ----
-000 ----
-uuu ----
Note: "-" stands for unimplemented
"u" stands for unchanged
"x" stands for unknown
Rev. 1.00
51
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Input/Output Ports
Holtek microcontrollers offer considerable flexibility on their I/O ports. With the input or output
designation of every pin fully under user program control, pull-high selections for all ports and
wake-up selections on certain pins, the user is provided with an I/O structure to meet the needs of a
wide range of application possibilities.
The device provides bidirectional input/output lines labeled with port names PA~PC. These I/O
ports are mapped to the RAM Data Memory with specific addresses as shown in the Special Purpose
Data Memory table. All of these I/O ports can be used for input and output operations. For input
operation, these ports are non-latching, which means the inputs must be ready at the T2 rising edge
of instruction "MOV A, [m]", where m denotes the port address. For output operation, all the data is
latched and remains unchanged until the output latch is rewritten.
Bit
Register
Name
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PA
PA7
PA6
PA5
PA4
PA3
PA2
PA1
PA0
PAC
PAC7
PAC6
PAC5
PAC4
PAC3
PAC2
PAC1
PAC0
PAPU
PAPU7
PAPU6
PAPU5
PAPU4
PAPU3
PAPU2
PAPU1
PAPU0
PAWU
PAWU7
PAWU6
PAWU5
PAWU4
PAWU3
PAWU2
PAWU1
PAWU0
PB
PB7
PB6
PB5
PB4
PB3
PB2
PB1
PB0
PBC
PBC7
PBC6
PBC5
PBC4
PBC3
PBC2
PBC1
PBC0
PBPU
PBPU7
PBPU6
PBPU5
PBPU4
PBPU3
PBPU2
PBPU1
PBPU0
PC
—
—
PC5
PC4
PC3
PC2
PC1
PC0
PCC
—
—
PCC5
PCC4
PCC3
PCC2
PCC1
PCC0
PCPU
—
—
PCPU5
PCPU4
PCPU3
PCPU2
PCPU1
PCPU0
I/O Ports Register List
Pull-high Resistors
Many product applications require pull-high resistors for their switch inputs usually requiring the
use of an external resistor. To eliminate the need for these external resistors, all I/O pins, when
configured as an input have the capability of being connected to an internal pull-high resistor. These
pull-high resistors are selected using registers PAPU~PCPU, and are implemented using weak
PMOS transistors.
Note that only when the I/O ports are configured as digital input or NMOS output, the internal pullhigh functions can be enabled using the PAPU~PCPU registers. In other conditions, internal pullhigh functions are disabled.
PAPU Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
PAPU7
PAPU6
PAPU5
PAPU4
PAPU3
PAPU2
PAPU1
PAPU0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7 ~ 0PAPU7~PAPU0: Port A Pin Pull-high Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Rev. 1.00
52
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
PBPU Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
PBPU7
PBPU6
PBPU5
PBPU4
PBPU3
PBPU2
PBPU1
PBPU0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7 ~ 0PBPU7~PBPU0: Port B Pin Pull-high Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
PCPU Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
PCPU5
PCPU4
PCPU3
PCPU2
PCPU1
PCPU0
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~6
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 5~0PCPU5~PCPU0: Port C Pin Pull-high Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Port A Wake-up
The HALT instruction forces the microcontroller into the SLEEP or IDLE Mode which preserves
power, a feature that is important for battery and other low-power applications. Various methods
exist to wake-up the microcontroller, one of which is to change the logic condition on one of the Port
A pins from high to low. This function is especially suitable for applications that can be woken up
via external switches. Each pin on Port A can be selected individually to have this wake-up feature
using the PAWU register.
Note that only when the Port A pins are configured as general purpose I/Os and the device is in the
HALT status, the Port A wake-up functions can be enabled using the relevant bits in the PAWU
register. In other conditions, the wake-up functions are disabled.
PAWU Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
PAWU7
PAWU6
PAWU5
PAWU4
PAWU3
PAWU2
PAWU1
PAWU0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7 ~ 0PAWU7~PAWU0: Port A Pin Wake-up Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
I/O Port Control Registers
Each I/O port has its own control register known as PAC~PCC, to control the input/output
configuration. With this control register, each CMOS output or input can be reconfigured
dynamically under software control. Each pin of the I/O ports is directly mapped to a bit in its
associated port control register. For the I/O pin to function as an input, the corresponding bit of the
control register must be written as a "1". This will then allow the logic state of the input pin to be
directly read by instructions. When the corresponding bit of the control register is written as a "0",
the I/O pin will be setup as a CMOS output. If the pin is currently setup as an output, instructions
can still be used to read the output register. However, it should be noted that the program will in fact
only read the status of the output data latch and not the actual logic status of the output pin.
Rev. 1.00
53
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
PAC Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
PAC7
PAC6
PAC5
PAC4
PAC3
PAC2
PAC1
PAC0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit 7 ~ 0PAC7~PAC0: Port A Pin Input/Output Type Selection
0: Output
1: Input
PBC Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
PBC7
PBC6
PBC5
PBC4
PBC3
PBC2
PBC1
PBC0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit 7~0PBC7~PBC0: Port B Pin Input/Output Type Selection
0: Output
1: Input
PCC Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
PCC5
PCC4
PCC3
PCC2
PCC1
PCC0
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit 7~6
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 5~0PCC5~PCC0: Port C Pin Input/Output Type Selection
0: Output
1: Input
Slew Rate Control
The PC1 port can be setup to have a choice of various slew rate using the SLEWC0 register. Refer
to the Slew Rate Control Characteristics section to obtain the exact value.
SLEWC0 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
—
—
—
—
SLEWC01
SLEWC00
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
Bit 7~2
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 1~0SLEWC01~SLEW00: PC1 output slew rate selection
00: Slew rate = Level 0
01: Slew rate = Level 1
10: Slew rate = Level 2
11: Slew rate = Level 3
Note: Users should refer to the Slew Rate Control Characteristics section to obtain the
exact value for different applications.
Rev. 1.00
54
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Source Current Selection
Each pin in this device can be configured with different output source current which is selected by
the corresponding source current selection bits. These source current selection bits are available
when the corresponding pin is configured as a CMOS output. Otherwise, these selection bits have no
effect. Users should refer to the D.C. Characteristics section to obtain the exact value for different
applications.
Bit
Register
Name
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SLEDC0 SLEDC07 SLEDC06 SLEDC05 SLEDC04 SLEDC03 SLEDC02 SLEDC01 SLEDC00
SLEDC1
—
—
—
—
SLEDC13 SLEDC12 SLEDC11 SLEDC10
I/O Port Source Current Selection Register List
SLEDC0 Register
Bit
Name
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SLEDC07 SLEDC06 SLEDC05 SLEDC04 SLEDC03 SLEDC02 SLEDC01 SLEDC00
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~6SLEDC07~SLEDC06: PB7~PB4 source current selection
00: Source current = Level 0 (Min.)
01: Source current = Level 1
10: Source current = Level 2
11: Source current = Level 3 (Max.)
Bit 5~4SLEDC05~SLEDC04: PB3~PB0 source current selection
00: Source current = Level 0 (Min.)
01: Source current = Level 1
10: Source current = Level 2
11: Source current = Level 3 (Max.)
Bit 3~2SLEDC03~SLEDC02: PA7~PA4 source current selection
00: Source current = Level 0 (Min.)
01: Source current = Level 1
10: Source current = Level 2
11: Source current = Level 3 (Max.)
Bit 1~0SLEDC01~SLEDC00: PA3~PA0 source current selection
00: Source current = Level 0 (Min.)
01: Source current = Level 1
10: Source current = Level 2
11: Source current = Level 3 (Max.)
Note: Users should refer to the D.C. Characteristics section to obtain the exact value
for different applications
Rev. 1.00
55
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
SLEDC1 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
Name
—
—
—
—
R/W
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~4
3
2
1
0
SLEDC13 SLEDC12 SLEDC11 SLEDC10
Unimplemented, read as “0”
Bit 3~2SLEDC13~SLEDC12: PC5 and PC4 source current selection
00: Source current = Level 0 (Min.)
01: Source current = Level 1
10: Source current = Level 2
11: Source current = Level 3 (Max.)
Bit 1~0SLEDC11~SLEDC10: PC3, PC2 and PC0 source current selection
00: Source current = Level 0 (Min.)
01: Source current = Level 1
10: Source current = Level 2
11: Source current = Level 3 (Max.)
Note: Users should refer to the D.C. Characteristics section to obtain the exact value
for different applications
Pin-shared Function
The flexibility of the microcontroller range is greatly enhanced by the use of pins that have more
than one function. Limited numbers of pins can force serious design constraints on designers but by
supplying pins with multi-functions, many of these difficulties can be overcome. For these pins, the
desired function of the multi-function I/O pins is selected by a series of registers via the application
program control.
Pin-shared Function Selection Registers
The limited number of supplied pins in a package can impose restrictions on the amount of functions
a certain device can contain. However by allowing the same pins to share several different functions
and providing a means of function selection, a wide range of different functions can be incorporated
into even relatively small package sizes. The device includes the CTRL3 and CTRL4 registers
which can select the desired functions of the multi-function pin-shared pins.
The most important point to note is to make sure that the desired pin-shared function is properly
selected and also deselected. To select the desired pin-shared function, the pin-shared function
should first be correctly selected using the corresponding pin-shared control register. After that the
corresponding peripheral functional setting should be configured and then the peripheral function
can be enabled. To correctly deselect the pin-shared function, the peripheral function should first be
disabled and then the corresponding pin-shared function control register can be modified to select
other pin-shared functions.
Bit
Register
Name
7
6
5
4
3
CTRL2
—
—
—
—
—
CTRL3
IOCN7
IOCN6
IOCN5
IOCN4
IOCN3
IOCN2
IOCN1
IOCN0
CTRL4
—
—
IOCN13
IOCN12
IOCN11
IOCN10
IOCN9
IOCN8
CTRL5
—
—
—
—
IOCN19
IOCN18
IOCN17
IOCN16
2
1
0
OCVPS2 OCVPS1 OCVPS0
Pin-shared Function Selection Register List
Rev. 1.00
56
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
• CTRL2 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
Name
—
—
—
—
—
2
1
0
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
OCVPS2 OCVPS1 OCVPS0
Bit 7~3
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 2~0
OCVPS2 ~ OCVPS0: OCVPAI0 signal input source pin selection
000: PB0
001: PB1
010: PB2
011: PB3
100: PA6
101: PA3
110: PA1
111: PA4
• CTRL3 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
IOCN7
IOCN6
IOCN5
IOCN4
IOCN3
IOCN2
IOCN1
IOCN0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~6IOCN7~IOCN6: PA6 pin function selection
00: PA6
01: PTP0
10: OCVPAI0
11: OCVPAI0
Bit 5IOCN5: PA5 pin function selection
0: PA5/INT1/STCK
1: OCVPCI
Bit 4~3IOCN4~IOCN3: PA4 pin function selection
00: PA4
01: STP
10: OCVPAI0
11: OCVPAI0
Bit 2IOCN2: PA3 pin function selection
0: PA3/INT0/CTCK
1: OCVPAI0
Bit 1~0IOCN1~IOCN0: PA1 pin function selection
00: PA1
01: CTP
10: OCVPAI0
11: OCVPAI0
Rev. 1.00
57
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
• CTRL4 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
IOCN13
IOCN12
IOCN11
IOCN10
IOCN9
IOCN8
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~6
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 5IOCN13: PC1 pin function selection
0: PC1
1: PTP1
Bit 4IOCN12: PB3 pin function selection
0: PB3
1: OCVPAI0
Bit 3IOCN11: PB2 pin function selection
0: PB2
1: OCVPAI0
Bit 2IOCN10: PB1 pin function selection
0: PB1
1: OCVPAI0
Bit 1IOCN9: PB0 pin function selection
0: PB0
1: OCVPAI0
Bit 0IOCN8: PA7 pin function selection
0: PA7/PTCK0
1: VREF
• CTRL5 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
—
—
IOCN19
IOCN18
IOCN17
IOCN16
R/W
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~4
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 3IOCN19: PB7 pin function selection
0: PB7
1: SCOM3
Bit 2IOCN18: PB6 pin function selection
0: PB6
1: SCOM2
Bit 1IOCN17: PB5 pin function selection
0: PB5
1: SCOM1
Bit 0IOCN16: PB4 pin function selection
0: PB4
1: SCOM0
Rev. 1.00
58
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
I/O Pin Structures
The accompanying diagrams illustrate the internal structures of some generic I/O pin types. As
the exact logical construction of the I/O pin will differ from these drawings, they are supplied as a
guide only to assist with the functional understanding of the I/O pins. The wide range of pin-shared
structures does not permit all types to be shown.
 
     Logic Function Input/Output Structure
Programming Considerations
Within the user program, one of the first things to consider is port initialisation. After a reset, all of
the I/O data and port control registers will be set high. This means that all I/O pins will default to
an input state, the level of which depends on the other connected circuitry and whether pull-high
selections have been chosen. If the port control registers, PAC~PCC, are then programmed to setup
some pins as outputs, these output pins will have an initial high output value unless the associated
port data registers, PA~PC, are first programmed. Selecting which pins are inputs and which are
outputs can be achieved byte-wide by loading the correct values into the appropriate port control
register or by programming individual bits in the port control register using the "SET [m].i" and
"CLR [m].i" instructions. Note that when using these bit control instructions, a read-modify-write
operation takes place. The microcontroller must first read in the data on the entire port, modify it to
the required new bit values and then rewrite this data back to the output ports.
Read/Write Timing
Port A has the additional capability of providing wake-up functions. When the device is in the
SLEEP or IDLE Mode, various methods are available to wake the device up. One of these is a high
to low transition of any of the Port A pins. Single or multiple pins on Port A can be setup to have this
function.
Rev. 1.00
59
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Timer Modules – TM
One of the most fundamental functions in any microcontroller device is the ability to control and
measure time. To implement time related functions the device includes several Timer Modules,
abbreviated to the name TM. The TMs are multi-purpose timing units and serve to provide
operations such as Timer/Counter, Input Capture, Compare Match Output and Single Pulse Output
as well as being the functional unit for the generation of PWM signals. Each of the TMs has two
individual interrupts. The addition of input and output pins for each TM ensures that users are
provided with timing units with a wide and flexible range of features.
The common features of the different TM types are described here with more detailed information
provided in the individual Compact, Standard and Periodic TM sections.
Introduction
The device contains a 10-bit Compact TM named CTM, a 10-bit Standard TM named STM and
two 10-bit Periodic TMs, named PTM0 and PTM1. Although similar in nature, the different TM
types vary in their feature complexity. The common features to the Compact, Standard and Periodic
TMs will be described in this section and the detailed operation will be described in corresponding
sections. The main features and differences between the three types of TM are summarised in the
accompanying table.
CTM
STM
PTM
Timer/Counter
Function
√
√
√
I/P Capture
—
√
√
Compare Match Output
√
√
√
PWM Channels
1
1
1
Single Pulse Output
—
1
1
Edge
Edge
Edge
Duty or Period
Duty or Period
Duty or Period
PWM Alignment
PWM Adjustment Period & Duty
TM Function Summary
CTM
10-bit CTM
STM
PTM
10-bit STM
10-bit PTM0
10-bit PTM1
TM Name/Type Reference
TM Operation
The three different types of TMs offer a diverse range of functions, from simple timing operations
to PWM signal generation. The key to understanding how the TM operates is to see it in terms of
a free running counter whose value is then compared with the value of pre-programmed internal
comparators. When the free running counter has the same value as the pre-programmed comparator,
known as a compare match situation, a TM interrupt signal will be generated which can clear the
counter and perhaps also change the condition of the TM output pin. The internal TM counter is
driven by a user selectable clock source, which can be an internal clock or an external pin.
Rev. 1.00
60
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
TM Clock Source
The clock source which drives the main counter in the TM can originate from various sources.
The selection of the required clock source is implemented using the xTnCK2~xTnCK0 bits in the
xTMn control registers, where "x" can stand for C, S or P Type TM and "n" is the specific TM serial
number. The clock source can be a ratio of either the system clock fSYS or the internal high clock fH,
the fSUB clock source or the external xTCKn pin. The xTCKn pin clock source is used to allow an
external signal to drive the TM as an external clock source or for event counting.
TM Interrupts
The Compact, Standard and Periodic type TMs each has two internal interrupts, the internal
comparator A or comparator P, which generate a TM interrupt when a compare match condition
occurs. When a TM interrupt is generated, it can be used to clear the counter and also to change the
state of the TM output pin. TM External Pins
Each of the TMs, irrespective of what type, has one TM input pin, with the label xTCKn.
The TM input pin, xTCKn, is essentially a clock source for the TM and is selected using the
xTnCK2~xTnCK0 bits in the xTMnC0 register. This external TM input pin allows an external clock
source to drive the internal TM. The TM input pin can be chosen to have either a rising or falling
active edge. The PTCKn pins are also used as the external trigger input pin in single pulse output
mode for the PTMn.
For the STM and PTMn, there is another input pin xTPn, which also can be the STM or PTMn
output pin. The STP or PTPn pin is the capture input pin whose active edge can be a rising edge,
a falling edge or both rising and falling edges. The active edge transition type is selected using the
STIO1~STIO0 bits in the STMC1 register or PTnIO1~PTnIO0 bits in the PTMnC1 register. For the
PTMn, there is another capture input, PTCKn, for PTMn capture input mode, which can be used as
the external trigger input source except for the PTPn pin.
The TMs each have one output pins, named xTPn. The TM output pin can be selected using the
corresponding pin-shared function selection bits described in the Pin-shared Function section. When
the TM is in the Compare Match Output Mode, these pins can be controlled by the TM to switch to
a high or low level or to toggle when a compare match situation occurs. The external xTPn output
pin is also the pin where the TM generates the PWM output waveform.
As the TM input or output pins are pin-shared with other functions, the TM external pin function
must first be setup using registers. A single bit in the Pin-shared Function Selection Registers
determines if its associated pin is to be used as an external TM pin or if it is to have another
function.
CTM
STM
PTMn(n=0 or 1)
Input
Output
Input
Output
Input
Output
CTCK
CTP
STCK/STP
STP
PTCKn/PTPn
PTPn
TM External Pins
Rev. 1.00
61
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
TM Input/Output Pin Control Register
Selecting to have a TM input/output or whether to retain its other shared function is implemented
using one register, with a single bit in the register corresponding to a TM input/output pin. Setting
the bit high will setup the corresponding pin as a TM input/output, if reset to zero the pin will retain
its original other function.
TCK input
CTCK
CTM
CTP
CCR output
CTM Function Pin Control Block Diagram
TCK input
STCK
STM
CCR capture input
CCR output
STP
STM Function Pin Control Block Diagram
TCK input
CCR capture input
PTCKn
PT�n
CCR capture input
CCR output
PTPn
PTMn Function Pin Control Block Diagram
Rev. 1.00
62
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Programming Considerations
The TM Counter Registers and the Capture/Compare CCRA and CCRP registers, being 10-bit, all
have a low and high byte structure. The high bytes can be directly accessed, but as the low bytes
can only be accessed via an internal 8-bit buffer, reading or writing to these register pairs must be
carried out in a specific way. The important point to note is that data transfer to and from the 8-bit
buffer and its related low byte only takes place when a write or read operation to its corresponding
high byte is executed.
As the CCRA and CCRP registers are implemented in the way shown in the following diagram and
accessing these registers is carried out in a specific way described above, it is recommended to use
the "MOV" instruction to access the CCRA and CCRP low byte registers, named xTMnAL and
PTMnRPL, in the following access procedures. Accessing the CCRA or CCRP low byte register
without following these access procedures will result in unpredictable values.
xT�n Counter Register (Read onl�)
xT�nDL
xT�nDH
8-bit
Buffer
xT�nAL
xT�nAH
xT�n CCRA Register
(Read/Write)
PT�nRPL PT�nRPH
PT�n CCRP Register (Read/Write)
Data Bus
The following steps show the read and write procedures:
• Writing Data to CCRA or CCRP
♦♦
Step 1. Write data to Low Byte xTMnAL or PTMnRPL
––note that here data is only written to the 8-bit buffer.
♦♦
Step 2. Write data to High Byte xTMnAH or PTMnRPH
––here data is written directly to the high byte registers and simultaneously data is latched
from the 8-bit buffer to the Low Byte registers.
• Reading Data from the Counter Registers and CCRA or CCRP
Rev. 1.00
♦♦
Step 1. Read data from the High Byte xTMnDH, xTMnAH or PTMnRPH
––here data is read directly from the High Byte registers and simultaneously data is latched
from the Low Byte register into the 8-bit buffer.
♦♦
Step 2. Read data from the Low Byte xTMnDL, xTMnAL or PTMnRPL
––this step reads data from the 8-bit buffer.
63
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Compact Type TM – CTM
Although the simplest form of the three TM types, the Compact TM type still contains three operating
modes, which are Compare Match Output, Timer/Event Counter and PWM Output modes. The
Compact TM can also be controlled with an external input pin and can drive one external output pin.
CCRP
fSYS/4
fSYS
fH/1�
fH/�4
fSUB
fSUB
CTCK
000
001
010
011
100
101
110
111
�-bit Comparator P
Comparator P �atch
CT�PF Interrupt
CTOC
b7~b9
10-bit Count-up Counter
CTON
CTPAU
Counter Clear
CTCCLR
b0~b9
10-bit Comparator A
Output
Control
Polarit�
Control
CT�1� CT�0
CTIO1� CTIO0
CTPOL
0
1
Comparator A �atch
Pin Control
CTP
IOCN0
CT�AF Interrupt
CTCK�~CTCK0
CCRA
Compact Type TM Block Diagram
Compact TM Operation
At its core is a 10-bit count-up counter which is driven by a user selectable internal or external clock
source. There are also two internal comparators with the names, Comparator A and Comparator
P. These comparators will compare the value in the counter with CCRP and CCRA registers. The
CCRP is three bits wide whose value is compared with the highest three bits in the counter while the
CCRA is the ten bits and therefore compares with all counter bits.
The only way of changing the value of the 10-bit counter using the application program, is to
clear the counter by changing the CTON bit from low to high. The counter will also be cleared
automatically by a counter overflow or a compare match with one of its associated comparators.
When these conditions occur, a CTM interrupt signal will also usually be generated. The Compact
Type TM can operate in a number of different operational modes, can be driven by different clock
sources including an input pin and can also control one output pin. All operating setup conditions
are selected using relevant internal registers.
Compact Type TM Register Description
Overall operation of the Compact TM is controlled using several registers. A read only register
pair exists to store the internal counter 10-bit value, while a read/write register pair exists to store
the internal 10-bit CCRA value. The remaining two registers are control registers which setup the
different operating and control modes as well as the three CCRP bits.
Bit
Register
Name
7
6
5
4
CTMC0
CTPAU
CTCK2
CTCK1
CTCK0
CTON
CTRP2
CTRP1
CTRP0
CTMC1
CTM1
CTM0
CTIO1
CTIO0
CTOC
CTPOL
CTDPX
CTCCLR
D0
3
2
1
0
CTMDL
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
CTMDH
—
—
—
—
—
—
D9
D8
CTMAL
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
CTMAH
—
—
—
—
—
—
D9
D8
Compact TM Register List
Rev. 1.00
64
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
CTMC0 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
CTPAU
CTCK2
CTCK1
CTCK0
CTON
CTRP2
CTRP1
CTRP0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7
CTPAU: CTM Counter Pause Control
0: Run
1: Pause
The counter can be paused by setting this bit high. Clearing the bit to zero restores
normal counter operation. When in a Pause condition the CTM will remain powered
up and continue to consume power. The counter will retain its residual value when
this bit changes from low to high and resume counting from this value when the bit
changes to a low value again.
Bit 6~4CTCK2~CTCK0: Select CTM Counter clock
000: fSYS/4
001: fSYS
010: fH/16
011: fH/64
100: fSUB
101: fSUB
110: CTCK rising edge clock
111: CTCK falling edge clock
These three bits are used to select the clock source for the CTM. The external pin
clock source can be chosen to be active on the rising or falling edge. The clock source
fSYS is the system clock, while fH and fSUB are other internal clocks, the details of which
can be found in the oscillator section.
Bit 3CTON: CTM Counter On/Off Control
0: Off
1: On
This bit controls the overall on/off function of the CTM. Setting the bit high enables
the counter to run, clearing the bit disables the CTM. Clearing this bit to zero will
stop the counter from counting and turn off the CTM which will reduce its power
consumption. When the bit changes state from low to high the internal counter value
will be reset to zero, however when the bit changes from high to low, the internal
counter will retain its residual value until the bit returns high again.
If the CTM is in the Compare Match Output Mode or the PWM Output Mode then
the CTM output pin will be reset to its initial condition, as specified by the CTOC bit,
when the CTON bit changes from low to high.
Bit 2~0
Rev. 1.00
CTRP2~CTRP0: CTM CCRP 3-bit register, compared with the CTM Counter bit 9~bit 7
Comparator P Match Period
000: 1024 CTM clocks
001: 128 CTM clocks
010: 256 CTM clocks
011: 384 CTM clocks
100: 512 CTM clocks
101: 640 CTM clocks
110: 768 CTM clocks
111: 896 CTM clocks
These three bits are used to setup the value on the internal CCRP 3-bit register, which
are then compared with the internal counter’s highest three bits. The result of this
comparison can be selected to clear the internal counter if the CTCCLR bit is set to zero.
Setting the CTCCLR bit to zero ensures that a compare match with the CCRP values
will reset the internal counter. As the CCRP bits are only compared with the highest
three counter bits, the compare values exist in 128 clock cycle multiples. Clearing all
three bits to zero is in effect allowing the counter to overflow at its maximum value.
65
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
CTMC1 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
CTM1
CTM0
CTIO1
CTIO0
CTOC
CTPOL
CTDPX
CTCCLR
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~6CTM1~CTM0: Select CTM Operating Mode
00: Compare Match Output Mode
01: Undefined
10: PWM Output Mode
11: Timer/Counter Mode
These bits setup the required operating mode for the CTM. To ensure reliable
operation the CTM should be switched off before any changes are made to the CTM1
and CTM0 bits. In the Timer/Counter Mode, the CTM output pin state is undefined.
Bit 5~4CTIO1~CTIO0: Select CTP output function
Compare Match Output Mode
00: No change
01: Output low
10: Output high
11: Toggle output
PWM Output Mode
00: PWM Output inactive state
01: PWM Output active state
10: PWM output
11: Undefined
Timer/counter Mode
Unused
These two bits are used to determine how the CTM output pin changes state when a
certain condition is reached. The function that these bits select depends upon in which
mode the CTM is running.
In the Compare Match Output Mode, the CTIO1 and CTIO0 bits determine how the
CTM output pin changes state when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A.
The CTM output pin can be setup to switch high, switch low or to toggle its present
state when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A. When the bits are both
zero, then no change will take place on the output. The initial value of the CTM output
pin should be setup using the CTOC bit in the CTMC1 register. Note that the output
level requested by the CTIO1 and CTIO0 bits must be different from the initial value
setup using the CTOC bit otherwise no change will occur on the CTM output pin when
a compare match occurs. After the CTM output pin changes state it can be reset to its
initial level by changing the level of the CTON bit from low to high.
In the PWM Output Mode, the CTIO1 and CTIO0 bits determine how the CTM
output pin changes state when a certain compare match condition occurs. The PWM
output function is modified by changing these two bits. It is necessary to only change
the values of the CTIO1 and CTIO0 bits only after the CTM has been switched off.
Unpredictable PWM outputs will occur if the CTIO1 and CTIO0 bits are changed
when The CTM is running.
Rev. 1.00
66
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Bit 3CTOC: CTP Output control bit
Compare Match Output Mode
0: Initial low
1: Initial high
PWM Output Mode
0: Active low
1: Active high
This is the output control bit for the CTM output pin. Its operation depends upon
whether CTM is being used in the Compare Match Output Mode or in the PWM
Output Mode. It has no effect if the CTM is in the Timer/Counter Mode. In the
Compare Match Output Mode it determines the logic level of the CTM output pin
before a compare match occurs. In the PWM Output Mode it determines if the PWM
signal is active high or active low.
Bit 2CTPOL: CTP Output polarity Control
0: Non-invert
1: Invert
This bit controls the polarity of the CTP output pin. When the bit is set high the CTM
output pin will be inverted and not inverted when the bit is zero. It has no effect if the
CTM is in the Timer/Counter Mode.
Bit 1CTDPX: CTM PWM period/duty Control
0: CCRP - period; CCRA - duty
1: CCRP - duty; CCRA - period
This bit, determines which of the CCRA and CCRP registers are used for period and
duty control of the PWM waveform.
Bit 0CTCCLR: Select CTM Counter clear condition
0: CTM Comparatror P match
1: CTM Comparatror A match
This bit is used to select the method which clears the counter. Remember that the CTM
contains two comparators, Comparator A and Comparator P, either of which can be
selected to clear the internal counter. With the CTCCLR bit set high, the counter will
be cleared when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A. When the bit is low,
the counter will be cleared when a compare match occurs from the Comparator P or
with a counter overflow. A counter overflow clearing method can only be implemented
if the CCRP bits are all cleared to zero. The CTCCLR bit is not used in the PWM
Output Mode.
CTMDL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7 ~ 0
CTM Counter Low Byte Register bit 7 ~ bit 0
CTM 10-bit Counter bit 7 ~ bit 0
CTMDH Register
Rev. 1.00
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
—
—
—
—
D9
D8
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
—
R
R
POR
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
Bit 7 ~ 2
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 1 ~ 0
CTM Counter High Byte Register bit 1 ~ bit 0
CTM 10-bit Counter bit 9 ~ bit 8
67
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
CTMAL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7 ~ 0
CTM CCRA Low Byte Register bit 7 ~ bit 0
CTM 10-bit CCRA bit 7 ~ bit 0
CTMAH Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
—
—
—
—
D9
D8
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
Bit 7 ~ 2
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 1 ~ 0
CTM CCRA High Byte Register bit 1 ~ bit 0
CTM 10-bit CCRA bit 9 ~ bit 8
Compact Type TM Operating Modes
The Compact Type TM can operate in one of three operating modes, Compare Match Output Mode,
PWM Output Mode or Timer/Counter Mode. The operating mode is selected using the CTM1 and
CTM0 bits in the CTMC1 register.
Compare Match Output Mode
To select this mode, bits CTM1 and CTM0 in the CTMC1 register, should be set to 00 respectively.
In this mode once the counter is enabled and running it can be cleared by three methods. These are
a counter overflow, a compare match from Comparator A and a compare match from Comparator P.
When the CTCCLR bit is low, there are two ways in which the counter can be cleared. One is when
a compare match from Comparator P, the other is when the CCRP bits are all zero which allows the
counter to overflow. Here both CTMAF and CTMPF interrupt request flags for Comparator A and
Comparator P respectively, will both be generated.
If the CTCCLR bit in the CTMC1 register is high then the counter will be cleared when a compare
match occurs from Comparator A. However, here only the CTMAF interrupt request flag will be
generated even if the value of the CCRP bits is less than that of the CCRA registers. Therefore when
CTCCLR is high no CTMPF interrupt request flag will be generated. If the CCRA bits are all zero,
the counter will overflow when its reaches its maximum 10-bit, 3FF Hex, value, however here the
CTMAF interrupt request flag will not be generated.
As the name of the mode suggests, after a comparison is made, the CTM output pin will change
state. The CTM output pin condition however only changes state when a CTMAF interrupt request
flag is generated after a compare match occurs from Comparator A. The CTMPF interrupt request
flag, generated from a compare match occurs from Comparator P, will have no effect on the CTM
output pin. The way in which the CTM output pin changes state are determined by the condition of
the CTIO1 and CTIO0 bits in the CTMC1 register. The CTM output pin can be selected using the
CTIO1 and CTIO0 bits to go high, to go low or to toggle from its present condition when a compare
match occurs from Comparator A. The initial condition of the CTM output pin, which is setup after
the CTON bit changes from low to high, is setup using the CTOC bit. Note that if the CTIO1 and
CTIO0 bits are zero then no pin change will take place.
Rev. 1.00
68
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Counter Value
Counter overflow
CCRP=0
0x3FF
CTCCLR = 0; CTM [1:0] = 00
CCRP > 0
Counter cleared by CCRP value
CCRP > 0
Counter
Restart
Resume
CCRP
Pause
CCRA
Stop
Time
CTON
CTPAU
CTPOL
CCRP Int. flag
CTMPF
CCRA Int. flag
CTMAF
CTM O/P Pin
Output pin set to
initial Level Low
if CTOC=0
Output not affected by CTMAF
flag. Remains High until reset by
CTON bit
Output Toggle with
CTMAF flag
Here CTIO [1:0] = 11
Toggle Output select
Note CTIO [1:0] = 10
Active High Output select
Output Inverts
when CTPOL is high
Output Pin
Reset to Initial value
Output controlled by
other pin-shared function
Compare Match Output Mode – CTCCLR=0
Note: 1. With CTCCLR=0, a Comparator P match will clear the counter
2. The CTM output pin controlled only by the CTMAF flag
3. The output pin reset to initial state by a CTON bit rising edge
Rev. 1.00
69
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Counter Value
CTCCLR = 1; CT� [1:0] = 00
CCRA = 0
Counter overflow
CCRA > 0 Counter cleared b� CCRA value
0x�FF
CCRA=0
Resume
CCRA
Pause
Stop
Counter Restart
CCRP
Time
CTON
CTPAU
CTPOL
No CT�AF flag
generated on
CCRA overflow
CCRA Int.
flag CT�AF
CCRP Int.
flag CT�PF
CT� O/P Pin
CT�PF not
generated
Output pin set to
initial Level Low
if CTOC=0
Output does
not change
Output not affected b�
CT�AF flag. Remains High
until reset b� CTON bit
Output Toggle with
CT�AF flag
Here CTIO [1:0] = 11
Toggle Output select
Note CTIO [1:0] = 10
Active High Output select
Output Inverts
when CTPOL is high
Output Pin
Reset to Initial value
Output controlled b�
other pin-shared function
Compare Match Output Mode – CTCCLR=1
Note: 1. With CTCCLR=1, a Comparator A match will clear the counter
2. The CTM output pin controlled only by the CTMAF flag
3. The output pin reset to initial state by a CTON rising edge
4. The CTMPF flags is not generated when CTCCLR=1
Rev. 1.00
70
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Timer/Counter Mode
To select this mode, bits CTM1 and CTM0 in the CTMC1 register should be set to 11 respectively.
The Timer/Counter Mode operates in an identical way to the Compare Match Output Mode
generating the same interrupt flags. The exception is that in the Timer/Counter Mode the CTM
output pin is not used. Therefore the above description and Timing Diagrams for the Compare
Match Output Mode can be used to understand its function. As the CTM output pin is not used in
this mode, the pin can be used as a normal I/O pin or other pin-shared function.
PWM Output Mode
To select this mode, bits CTM1 and CTM0 in the CTMC1 register should be set to 10 respectively.
The PWM function within the CTM is useful for applications which require functions such as motor
control, heating control, illumination control etc. By providing a signal of fixed frequency but of
varying duty cycle on the CTM output pin, a square wave AC waveform can be generated with
varying equivalent DC RMS values.
As both the period and duty cycle of the PWM waveform can be controlled, the choice of generated
waveform is extremely flexible. In the PWM Output Mode, the CTCCLR bit has no effect on the
PWM operation. Both of the CCRA and CCRP registers are used to generate the PWM waveform,
one register is used to clear the internal counter and thus control the PWM waveform frequency,
while the other one is used to control the duty cycle. Which register is used to control either
frequency or duty cycle is determined using the CTDPX bit in the CTMC1 register. The PWM
waveform frequency and duty cycle can therefore be controlled by the values in the CCRA and
CCRP registers.
An interrupt flag, one for each of the CCRA and CCRP, will be generated when a compare match
occurs from either Comparator A or Comparator P. The CTOC bit In the CTMC1 register is used to
select the required polarity of the PWM waveform while the two CTIO1 and CTIO0 bits are used to
enable the PWM output or to force the CTM output pin to a fixed high or low level. The CTPOL bit
is used to reverse the polarity of the PWM output waveform.
• CTM, PWM Output Mode, Edge-aligned Mode, CTDPX=0
CCRP
001b
010b
011b
100b
101b
110b
111b
000b
Period
128
256
384
512
640
768
896
1024
Duty
CCRA
If fSYS=16MHz, CTM clock source is fSYS/4, CCRP=100b, CCRA =128,
The CTM PWM output frequency=(fSYS/4) / 512=fSYS/2048=7.8125 kHz, duty=128/512=25%.
If the Duty value defined by the CCRA register is equal to or greater than the Period value, then the
PWM output duty is 100%.
• CTM, PWM Output Mode, Edge-aligned Mode, CTDPX=1
CCRP
001b
010b
011b
100b
Period
Duty
101b
110b
111b
000b
768
896
1024
CCRA
128
256
384
512
640
The PWM output period is determined by the CCRA register value together with the CTM clock
while the PWM duty cycle is defined by the CCRP register value.
Rev. 1.00
71
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Counter Value
CTDPX = 0; CT� [1:0] = 10
Counter cleared
b� CCRP
Counter Reset when
CTON returns high
CCRP
Pause Resume
CCRA
Counter Stop if
CTON bit low
Time
CTON
CTPAU
CTPOL
CCRA Int.
flag CT�AF
CCRP Int.
flag CT�PF
CT� O/P
Pin (CTOC=1)
CT� O/P
Pin (CTOC=0)
PW� Dut� C�cle
set b� CCRA
PW� Period
set b� CCRP
PW� resumes
operation
Output controlled b�
Output Inverts
other pin-shared function
when CTPOL = 1
PWM Output Mode – CTDPX=0
Note: 1. Here CTDPX=0 - Counter cleared by CCRP
2. A counter clear sets PWM Period
3. The internal PWM function continues running even when CTIO[1:0]=00 or 01
4. The CTCCLR bit has no influence on PWM operation
Rev. 1.00
72
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Counter Value
CTDPX = 1; CT� [1:0] = 10
Counter cleared
b� CCRA
Counter Reset when
CTON returns high
CCRA
Pause Resume
CCRP
Counter Stop if
CTON bit low
Time
CTON
CTPAU
CTPOL
CCRP Int.
flag CT�PF
CCRA Int.
flag CT�AF
CT� O/P
Pin (CTOC=1)
CT� O/P
Pin (CTOC=0)
PW� Dut� C�cle
set b� CCRP
PW� Period
set b� CCRA
PW� resumes
operation
Output controlled b�
Output Inverts
other pin-shared function
when CTPOL = 1
PWM Output Mode – CTDPX=1
Note: 1. Here CTDPX=1 – Counter cleared by CCRA
2. A counter clear sets PWM Period
3. The internal PWM function continues even when CTIO[1:0]=00 or 01
4. The CTCCLR bit has no influence on PWM operation
Rev. 1.00
73
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Standard Type TM – STM
The Standard Type TM contains five operating modes, which are Compare Match Output, Timer/
Event Counter, Capture Input, Single Pulse Output and PWM Output modes. The Standard TM can
be controlled with one external input pin and can drive one external output pin.
CCRP
fSYS/4
fSYS
fH/16
fH/64
fSUB
fSUB
STCK
000
001
010
011
100
101
110
111
3-bit Comparator P
Comparator P Match
STMPF Interrupt
STOC
b7~b9
10-bit Count-up Counter
STON
STPAU
STCK2~STCK0
Counter Clear 0
1
STCCLR
b0~b9
10-bit Comparator A
Output
Control
Polarity
Control
Pin
Control
STM1, STM0
STIO1, STIO0
STPOL
IOCN2
Comparator A Match
STP
STMAF Interrupt
STIO1, STIO0
Edge
Detector
CCRA
Standard Type TM Block Diagram
Standard TM Operation
At its core is a 10-bit count-up counter which is driven by a user selectable internal clock source.
There are also two internal comparators with the names, Comparator A and Comparator P. These
comparators will compare the value in the counter with CCRP and CCRA registers. The CCRP is 3-bit
wide whose value is compared with the highest 3 bits in the counter while the CCRA is the 10 bits
and therefore compares with all counter bits.
The only way of changing the value of the 10-bit counter using the application program, is to
clear the counter by changing the STON bit from low to high. The counter will also be cleared
automatically by a counter overflow or a compare match with one of its associated comparators.
When these conditions occur, a STM interrupt signal will also usually be generated. The Standard
Type TM can operate in a number of different operational modes, can be driven by different clock
sources and can also control an output pin. All operating setup conditions are selected using relevant
internal registers.
Standard Type TM Register Description
Overall operation of the Standard TM is controlled using series of registers. A read only register
pair exists to store the internal counter 10-bit value, while a read/write register pair exists to store
the internal 10-bit CCRA value. The remaining two registers are control registers which setup the
different operating and control modes as well as three CCRP bits.
Bit
Register
Name
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
STMC0
STPAU
STCK2
STCK1
STCK0
STON
STRP2
STRP1
STRP0
STMC1
STM1
STM0
STIO1
STIO0
STOC
STPOL
STDPX
STCCLR
STMDL
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
STMDH
—
—
—
—
—
—
D9
D8
STMAL
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
STMAH
—
—
—
—
—
—
D9
D8
10-bit Standard TM Register List
Rev. 1.00
74
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
STMC0 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
STPAU
STCK2
STCK1
STCK0
STON
STRP2
STRP1
STRP0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7STPAU: STM Counter Pause Control
0: Run
1: Pause
The counter can be paused by setting this bit high. Clearing the bit to zero restores
normal counter operation. When in a Pause condition the STM will remain powered
up and continue to consume power. The counter will retain its residual value when
this bit changes from low to high and resume counting from this value when the bit
changes to a low value again.
Bit 6~4STCK2~STCK0: Select STM Counter clock
000: fSYS/4
001: fSYS
010: fH/16
011: fH/64
100: fSUB
101: fSUB
110: STCK rising edge clock
111: STCK falling edge clock
These three bits are used to select the clock source for the STM. The external pin clock
source can be chosen to be active on the rising or falling edge. The clock source fSYS is
the system clock, while fH and fSUB are other internal clocks, the details of which can
be found in the oscillator section.
Bit 3STON: STM Counter On/Off Control
0: Off
1: On
This bit controls the overall on/off function of the STM. Setting the bit high enables
the counter to run, clearing the bit disables the STM. Clearing this bit to zero will
stop the counter from counting and turn off the STM which will reduce its power
consumption. When the bit changes state from low to high the internal counter value
will be reset to zero, however when the bit changes from high to low, the internal
counter will retain its residual value until the bit returns high again. If the STM is in
the Compare Match Output Mode or the PWM output Mode or Single Pulse Output
Mode then the STM output pin will be reset to its initial condition, as specified by the
STOC bit, when the STON bit changes from low to high.
Bit 2~0
Rev. 1.00
STRP2~ STRP0: STM CCRP 3-bit register, compared with the STM Counter bit 9~bit 7
Comparator P Match Period
000: 1024 STM clocks
001: 128 STM clocks
010: 256 STM clocks
011: 384 STM clocks
100: 512 STM clocks
101: 640 STM clocks
110: 768 STM clocks
111: 896 STM clocks
These three bits are used to setup the value on the internal CCRP 3-bit register, which
are then compared with the internal counter’s highest three bits. The result of this
comparison can be selected to clear the internal counter if the STCCLR bit is set to zero.
Setting the STCCLR bit to zero ensures that a compare match with the CCRP values
will reset the internal counter. As the CCRP bits are only compared with the highest
three counter bits, the compare values exist in 128 clock cycle multiples. Clearing all
three bits to zero is in effect allowing the counter to overflow at its maximum value.
75
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
STMC1 Register
Rev. 1.00
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
STM1
STM0
STIO1
STIO0
STOC
STPOL
STDPX
STCCLR
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~6
STM1~ STM0: Select STM Operating Mode
00: Compare Match Output Mode
01: Capture Input Mode
10: PWM Output Mode or Single Pulse Output Mode
11: Timer/Counter Mode
These bits setup the required operating mode for the STM. To ensure reliable operation
the STM should be switched off before any changes are made to the STM1 and STM0
bits. In the Timer/Counter Mode, the STM output pin state is undefined.
Bit 5~4
STIO1~ STIO0: Select STM function
Compare Match Output Mode
00: No change
01: Output low
10: Output high
11: Toggle output
PWM output Mode/Single Pulse Output Mode
00: PWM Output inactive state
01: PWM Output active state
10: PWM output
11: Single pulse output
Capture Input Mode
00: Input capture at rising edge of STP
01: Input capture at falling edge of STP
10: Input capture at falling/rising edge of STP
11: Input capture disabled
Timer/counter Mode
Unused
These two bits are used to determine how the STM output pin changes state when a
certain condition is reached. The function that these bits select depends upon in which
mode the STM is running.
In the Compare Match Output Mode, the STIO1~STIO0 bits determine how the STM
output pin changes state when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A. The
STM output pin can be setup to switch high, switch low or to toggle its present state
when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A. When the STIO1~STIO0
bits are both zero, then no change will take place on the output. The initial value of
the STM output pin should be setup using the STOC bit. Note that the output level
requested by the STIO1~STIO0 bits must be different from the initial value setup
using the STOC bit otherwise no change will occur on the STM output pin when a
compare match occurs. After the STM output pin changes state, it can be reset to its
initial level by changing the level of the STON bit from low to high.
In the PWM Output Mode, the STIO1 and STIO0 bits determine how the STM output
pin changes state when a certain compare match condition occurs. The PWM output
function is modified by changing these two bits. It is necessary to change the values of
the STIO1 and STIO0 bits only after the STM has been switched off. Unpredictable
PWM outputs will occur if the STIO1 and STIO0 bits are changed when the STM is
running.
76
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Bit 3STOC: STM Output control bit
Compare Match Output Mode
0: Initial low
1: Initial high
PWM output Mode/ Single Pulse Output Mode
0: Active low
1: Active high
This is the output control bit for the STM output pin. Its operation depends upon
whether STM is being used in the Compare Match Output Mode or in the PWM
output Mode/ Single Pulse Output Mode. It has no effect if the STM is in the Timer/
Counter Mode. In the Compare Match Output Mode it determines the logic level
of the STM output pin before a compare match occurs. In the PWM output Mode it
determines if the PWM signal is active high or active low. In the Single Pulse Output
Mode it determines the logic level of the STM output pin when the STON bit changes
from low to high.
Bit 2STPOL: STM Output polarity Control
0: Non-invert
1: Invert
This bit controls the polarity of the STM output pin. When the bit is set high the STM
output pin will be inverted and not inverted when the bit is zero. It has no effect if the
STM is in the Timer/Counter Mode.
Bit 1STDPX: STM PWM period/duty Control
0: CCRP - period; CCRA - duty
1: CCRP - duty; CCRA - period
This bit, determines which of the CCRA and CCRP registers are used for period and
duty control of the PWM waveform.
Bit 0STCCLR: Select STM Counter clear condition
0: STM Comparator P match
1: STM Comparator A match
This bit is used to select the method which clears the counter. Remember that the
Standard TM contains two comparators, Comparator A and Comparator P, either of
which can be selected to clear the internal counter. With the STCCLR bit set high,
the counter will be cleared when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A.
When the bit is low, the counter will be cleared when a compare match occurs from
the Comparator P or with a counter overflow. A counter overflow clearing method can
only be implemented if the CCRP bits are all cleared to zero. The STCCLR bit is not
used in the PWM output mode, Single Pulse or Input Capture Mode.
STMDL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~0
STM Counter Low Byte Register bit 7 ~ bit 0
STM 10-bit Counter bit 7 ~ bit 0
STMDH Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
—
—
—
—
D9
D8
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
—
R
R
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
POR
Bit 7~2
Bit 1~0
Rev. 1.00
Unimplemented, read as "0"
STM Counter High Byte Register bit 1 ~ bit 0
STM 10-bit Counter bit 9 ~ bit 8
77
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
STMAL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~0
STM CCRA Low Byte Register bit 7 ~ bit 0
STM 10-bit CCRA bit 7 ~ bit 0
STMAH Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
—
—
—
—
D9
D8
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
Bit 7~2
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 1~0
STM CCRA High Byte Register bit 1 ~ bit 0
STM 10-bit CCRA bit 9 ~ bit 8
Standard Type TM Operating Modes
The Standard Type TM can operate in one of five operating modes, Compare Match Output Mode,
PWM Output Mode, Single Pulse Output Mode, Capture Input Mode or Timer/Counter Mode. The
operating mode is selected using the STM1 and STM0 bits in the STMC1 register.
Compare Match Output Mode
To select this mode, bits STM1 and STM0 in the STMC1 register, should be set to 00 respectively.
In this mode once the counter is enabled and running it can be cleared by three methods. These are
a counter overflow, a compare match from Comparator A and a compare match from Comparator P.
When the STCCLR bit is low, there are two ways in which the counter can be cleared. One is when
a compare match from Comparator P, the other is when the CCRP bits are all zero which allows the
counter to overflow. Here both STMAF and STMPF interrupt request flags for Comparator A and
Comparator P respectively, will both be generated.
If the STCCLR bit in the STMC1 register is high then the counter will be cleared when a compare
match occurs from Comparator A. However, here only the STMAF interrupt request flag will be
generated even if the value of the CCRP bits is less than that of the CCRA registers. Therefore when
STCCLR is high no STMPF interrupt request flag will be generated. In the Compare Match Output
Mode, the CCRA cannot be set to "0". If the CCRA bits are all zero, the counter will overflow when
it reaches its maximum 10-bit, 3FF Hex, value, however here the STMAF interrupt request flag will
not be generated.
As the name of the mode suggests, after a comparison is made, the STM output pin, will change
state. The STM output pin condition however only changes state when an STMAF interrupt request
flag is generated after a compare match occurs from Comparator A. The STMPF interrupt request
flag, generated from a compare match occurs from Comparator P, will have no effect on the STM
output pin. The way in which the STM output pin changes state are determined by the condition of
the STIO1 and STIO0 bits in the STMC1 register. The STM output pin can be selected using the
STIO1 and STIO0 bits to go high, to go low or to toggle from its present condition when a compare
match occurs from Comparator A. The initial condition of the STM output pin, which is setup after
the STON bit changes from low to high, is setup using the STOC bit. Note that if the STIO1 and
STIO0 bits are zero then no pin change will take place.
Rev. 1.00
78
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Counter Value
Counter overflow
CCRP=0
0x3FF
STCCLR = 0; STM [1:0] = 00
CCRP > 0
Counter cleared by CCRP value
CCRP > 0
Counter
Restart
Resume
CCRP
Pause
CCRA
Stop
Time
STON
STPAU
STPOL
CCRP Int.
flag STMPF
CCRA Int.
flag STMAF
STM O/P Pin
Output pin set to
initial Level Low
if STOC=0
Output not affected by STMAF
flag. Remains High until reset by
STON bit
Output Toggle with
STMAF flag
Here STIO [1:0] = 11
Toggle Output select
Note STIO [1:0] = 10
Active High Output select
Output Inverts
when STPOL is high
Output Pin
Reset to Initial value
Output controlled by
other pin-shared function
Compare Match Output Mode – STCCLR=0
Note: 1. With STCCLR=0 a Comparator P match will clear the counter
2. The STM output pin controlled only by the STMAF flag
3. The output pin reset to initial state by a STON bit rising edge
Rev. 1.00
79
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Counter Value
STCCLR = 1; STM [1:0] = 00
CCRA = 0
Counter overflow
CCRA > 0 Counter cleared by CCRA value
0x3FF
CCRA=0
Resume
CCRA
Pause
Stop
Counter Restart
CCRP
Time
STON
STPAU
STPOL
No STMAF flag
generated on
CCRA overflow
CCRA Int.
flag STMAF
CCRP Int.
flag STMPF
STM O/P
Pin
STMPF not
generated
Output pin set to
initial Level Low
if STOC=0
Output does
not change
Output Toggle with
STMAF flag
Here STIO [1:0] = 11
Toggle Output select
Output not affected by
STMAF flag. Remains High
until reset by STON bit
Note STIO [1:0] = 10
Active High Output select
Output Inverts
when STPOL is high
Output Pin
Reset to Initial value
Output controlled by
other pin-shared function
Compare Match Output Mode – STCCLR=1
Note: 1. With STCCLR=1 a Comparator A match will clear the counter
2. The STM output pin controlled only by the STMAF flag
3. The output pin reset to initial state by a STON rising edge
4. The STMPF flag is not generated when STCCLR=1
Rev. 1.00
80
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Timer/Counter Mode
To select this mode, bits STM1 and STM0 in the STMC1 register should be set to 11 respectively.
The Timer/Counter Mode operates in an identical way to the Compare Match Output Mode
generating the same interrupt flags. The exception is that in the Timer/Counter Mode the STM
output pin is not used. Therefore the above description and Timing Diagrams for the Compare
Match Output Mode can be used to understand its function. As the STM output pin is not used in
this mode, the pin can be used as a normal I/O pin or other pin-shared function by setting pin-share
function register.
PWM Output Mode
To select this mode, bits STM1 and STM0 in the STMC1 register should be set to 10 respectively
and also the STIO1 and STIO0 bits should be set to 10 respectively. The PWM function within
the STM is useful for applications which require functions such as motor control, heating control,
illumination control etc. By providing a signal of fixed frequency but of varying duty cycle on the
STM output pin, a square wave AC waveform can be generated with varying equivalent DC RMS
values.
As both the period and duty cycle of the PWM waveform can be controlled, the choice of generated
waveform is extremely flexible. In the PWM output mode, the STCCLR bit has no effect as the
PWM period. Both of the CCRA and CCRP registers are used to generate the PWM waveform, one
register is used to clear the internal counter and thus control the PWM waveform frequency, while
the other one is used to control the duty cycle. Which register is used to control either frequency
or duty cycle is determined using the STDPX bit in the STMC1 register. The PWM waveform
frequency and duty cycle can therefore be controlled by the values in the CCRA and CCRP registers.
An interrupt flag, one for each of the CCRA and CCRP, will be generated when a compare match
occurs from either Comparator A or Comparator P. The STOC bit in the STMC1 register is used to
select the required polarity of the PWM waveform while the two STIO1 and STIO0 bits are used to
enable the PWM output or to force the STM output pin to a fixed high or low level. The STPOL bit
is used to reverse the polarity of the PWM output waveform.
• 10-bit STM, PWM Output Mode, Edge-aligned Mode, STDPX=0
CCRP
001b
010b
011b
100b
101b
110b
111b
000b
Period
128
256
384
512
640
768
896
1024
Duty
CCRA
If fSYS=4MHz, TM clock source is fSYS/4, CCRP=100b and CCRA =128,
The STM PWM output frequency=(fSYS/4) / 512=fSYS/2048=1.9531kHz, duty=128/512=25%.
If the Duty value defined by the CCRA register is equal to or greater than the Period value, then the
PWM output duty is 100%.
• 10-bit STM, PWM Output Mode, Edge-aligned Mode, STDPX=1
CCRP
001b
010b
011b
100b
Period
Duty
101b
110b
111b
000b
768
896
1024
CCRA
128
256
384
512
640
The PWM output period is determined by the CCRA register value together with the STM clock
while the PWM duty cycle is defined by the CCRP register value.
Rev. 1.00
81
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Counter Value
STDPX = 0; STM [1:0] = 10
Counter cleared
by CCRP
Counter Reset when
STON returns high
CCRP
Pause Resume
CCRA
Counter Stop if
STON bit low
Time
STON
STPAU
STPOL
CCRA Int.
flag STMAF
CCRP Int.
flag STMPF
STM O/P Pin
(STOC=1)
STM O/P Pin
(STOC=0)
PWM Duty Cycle
set by CCRA
PWM Period
set by CCRP
PWM resumes
operation
Output controlled by
Output Inverts
other pin-shared function
when STPOL = 1
PWM Output Mode – STDPX=0
Note: 1. Here STDPX=0 - Counter cleared by CCRP
2. A counter clear sets PWM Period
3. The internal PWM function continues running even when STIO[1:0]=00 or 01
4. The STCCLR bit has no influence on PWM operation
Rev. 1.00
82
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Counter Value
STDPX = 1; STM [1:0] = 10
Counter cleared
by CCRA
Counter Reset when
STON returns high
CCRA
Pause Resume
CCRP
Counter Stop if
STON bit low
Time
STON
STPAU
STPOL
CCRP Int.
flag STMPF
CCRA Int.
flag STMAF
STM O/P
Pin (STOC=1)
STM O/P
Pin (STOC=0)
PWM Duty Cycle
set by CCRP
PWM Period
set by CCRA
PWM resumes
operation
Output controlled by
Output Inverts
other pin-shared function
when STPOL = 1
PWM Output Mode – STDPX=1
Note: 1. Here STDPX=1 - Counter cleared by CCRA
2. A counter clear sets PWM Period
3. The internal PWM function continues even when STIO[1:0]=00 or 01
4. The STCCLR bit has no influence on PWM operation
Rev. 1.00
83
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Single Pulse Mode
To select this mode, bits STM1 and STM0 in the STMC1 register should be set to 10 respectively
and also the STIO1 and STIO0 bits should be set to 11 respectively. The Single Pulse Output Mode,
as the name suggests, will generate a single shot pulse on the STM output pin.
The trigger for the pulse output leading edge is a low to high transition of the STON bit, which can
be implemented using the application program. However in the Single Pulse Mode, the STON bit
can also be made to automatically change from low to high using the external STCK pin, which will
in turn initiate the Single Pulse output. When the STON bit transitions to a high level, the counter
will start running and the pulse leading edge will be generated. The STON bit should remain high
when the pulse is in its active state. The generated pulse trailing edge will be generated when the
STON bit is cleared to zero, which can be implemented using the application program or when a
compare match occurs from Comparator A.
S/W Command
SET“STON”
or
STCK Pin
Transition
CCRA
Leading Edge
CCRA
Trailing Edge
STON bit
0à1
STON bit
1à0
S/W Command
CLR“STON”
or
CCRA Compare
Match
STP Output Pin
Pulse Width = CCRA Value
Single Pulse Generation
Rev. 1.00
84
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Counter Value
STM [1:0] = 10 ; STIO [1:0] = 11
Counter stopped
by CCRA
Counter Reset when
STON returns high
CCRA
Pause
Counter Stops
by software
Resume
CCRP
Time
STON
Software
Trigger
Auto. set by
STCK pin
Cleared by
CCRA match
STCK pin
Software
Trigger
Software
Trigger
Software
Clear
Software
Trigger
STCK pin
Trigger
STPAU
STPOL
No CCRP Interrupts
generated
CCRP Int. Flag
STMPF
CCRA Int. Flag
STMAF
STM O/P Pin
(STOC=1)
STM O/P Pin
(STOC=0)
Output Inverts
when STPOL = 1
Pulse Width
set by CCRA
Single Pulse Mode
Note: 1. Counter stopped by CCRA match
2. CCRP is not used
3. The pulse is triggered by setting the STON bit high
4. In the Single Pulse Mode, STIO [1:0] must be set to "11" and cannot be changed.
However a compare match from Comparator A will also automatically clear the STON bit and thus
generate the Single Pulse output trailing edge. In this way the CCRA value can be used to control the
pulse width. A compare match from Comparator A will also generate a STM interrupt. The counter
can only be reset back to zero when the STON bit changes from low to high when the counter
restarts. In the Single Pulse Mode CCRP is not used. The STCCLR and STDPX bits are not used in
this Mode.
Rev. 1.00
85
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Capture Input Mode
To select this mode bits STM1 and STM0 in the STMC1 register should be set to 01 respectively.
This mode enables external signals to capture and store the present value of the internal counter
and can therefore be used for applications such as pulse width measurement. The external signal
is supplied on the STP, whose active edge can be either a rising edge, a falling edge or both rising
and falling edges; the active edge transition type is selected using the STIO1 and STIO0 bits in
the STMC1 register. The counter is started when the STON bit changes from low to high which is
initiated using the application program.
When the required edge transition appears on the STP the present value in the counter will be
latched into the CCRA registers and a STM interrupt generated. Irrespective of what events occur on
the STP the counter will continue to free run until the STON bit changes from high to low. When a
CCRP compare match occurs the counter will reset back to zero; in this way the CCRP value can be
used to control the maximum counter value. When a CCRP compare match occurs from Comparator
P, a STM interrupt will also be generated. Counting the number of overflow interrupt signals from
the CCRP can be a useful method in measuring long pulse widths. The STIO1 and STIO0 bits can
select the active trigger edge on the STP to be a rising edge, falling edge or both edge types. If
the STIO1 and STIO0 bits are both set high, then no capture operation will take place irrespective
of what happens on the STP, however it must be noted that the counter will continue to run. The
STCCLR and STDPX bits are not used in this Mode.
Counter Value
STM [1:0] = 01
Counter cleared
by CCRP
Counter Counter
Stop
Reset
CCRP
YY
Pause
Resume
XX
Time
STON
STPAU
Active
edge
Active
edge
Active edge
STM capture
pin STP
CCRA Int. Flag
STMAF
CCRP Int. Flag
STMPF
CCRA
Value
STIO [1:0]
Value
XX
00 – Rising edge
YY
01 – Falling edge
XX
10 – Both edges
YY
11 – Disable Capture
Capture Input Mode
Note: 1. STM[1:0]=01 and active edge set by the STIO[1:0] bits
2. A TM Capture input pin active edge transfers the counter value to CCRA
3. The STCCLR and STDPX bits are not used
4. No output function — STOC and STPOL bits are not used
5. CCRP determines the counter value and the counter has a maximum count value when
CCRP is equal to zero.
Rev. 1.00
86
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Periodic Type TM – PTM
The Periodic Type TM contains five operating modes, which are Compare Match Output, Timer/
Event Counter, Capture Input, Single Pulse Output and PWM Output modes. The Periodic TM can
be controlled with two external input pins and can drive one external output pin.
CCRP
10-bit Comparator P
fSYS/4
000
fSYS
fH/1�
fH/�4
fSUB
001
fSUB
101
PT�nPF Interrupt
PTnOC
b0~b9
010
011
10-bit Count-up Counter
100
110
PTCKn
Comparator P �atch
PTnON
PTnPAU
Counter Clear
PTnCCLR
b0~b9
111
PTnCK�~PTnCK0
10-bit Comparator A
CCRA
Output
Control
Polarit�
Control
Pin
Control
PTn�1� PTn�0
PTnIO1� PTnIO0
PTnPOL
IOCNx
0
1
Comparator A �atch
PTPn
PT�nAF Interrupt
PTnIO1� PTnIO0
PTnCAPTS
Edge
Detector
0
IOCNx
Pin
Control
1
Periodic Type TM Block Diagram (n=0 or 1)
Periodic TM Operation
The Periodic Type TM core is a 10-bit count-up counter which is driven by a user selectable internal
or external clock source. There are also two internal comparators with the names, Comparator A
and Comparator P. These comparators will compare the value in the counter with CCRP and CCRA
registers. The CCRP comparator is 10-bit wide.
The only way of changing the value of the 10-bit counter using the application program, is to
clear the counter by changing the PTnON bit from low to high. The counter will also be cleared
automatically by a counter overflow or a compare match with one of its associated comparators.
When these conditions occur, a PTMn interrupt signal will also usually be generated. The Periodic
Type TM can operate in a number of different operational modes, can be driven by different clock
sources including an input pin and can also control more than one output pin. All operating setup
conditions are selected using relevant internal registers.
Periodic Type TM Register Description
Overall operation of the Periodic Type TM is controlled using a series of registers. A read only
register pair exists to store the internal counter 10-bit value, while two read/write register pairs exist
to store the internal 10-bit CCRA value and CCRP value. The remaining two registers are control
registers which setup the different operating and control modes.
Register
Name
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PTMnC0
PTnPAU PTnCK2 PTnCK1 PTnCK0
PTnON
—
—
—
PTMnC1
PTnM1
PTnM0
PTnIO1
PTnIO0
PTnOC
PTMnDL
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
PTnPOL PTnCAPTS PTnCCLR
D2
D1
D0
D8
PTMnDH
—
—
—
—
—
—
D9
PTMnAL
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PTMnAH
—
—
—
—
—
—
D9
D8
PTMnRPL
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
PTMnRPH
—
—
—
—
—
—
D9
D8
10-bit Periodic TM Register List (n=0 or 1)
Rev. 1.00
87
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
PTMnC0 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
PTnPAU
PTnCK2
PTnCK1
PTnCK0
PTnON
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
POR
0
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
Bit 7PTnPAU: PTMn Counter Pause Control
0: Run
1: Pause
The counter can be paused by setting this bit high. Clearing the bit to zero restores
normal counter operation. When in a Pause condition the PTMn will remain powered
up and continue to consume power. The counter will retain its residual value when
this bit changes from low to high and resume counting from this value when the bit
changes to a low value again.
Bit 6~4PTnCK2~PTnCK0: Select PTMn Counter clock
000: fSYS/4
001: fSYS
010: fH/16
011: fH/64
100: fSUB
101: fSUB
110: PTCKn rising edge clock
111: PTCKn falling edge clock
These three bits are used to select the clock source for the PTMn. The external pin
clock source can be chosen to be active on the rising or falling edge. The clock source
fSYS is the system clock, while fH and fSUB are other internal clocks, the details of which
can be found in the oscillator section.
Bit 3PTnON: PTMn Counter On/Off Control
0: Off
1: On
This bit controls the overall on/off function of the PTMn. Setting the bit high enables
the counter to run, clearing the bit disables the PTMn. Clearing this bit to zero will
stop the counter from counting and turn off the PTMn which will reduce its power
consumption. When the bit changes state from low to high the internal counter value
will be reset to zero, however when the bit changes from high to low, the internal
counter will retain its residual value until the bit returns high again.
If the PTMn is in the Compare Match Output Mode, PWM output Mode or Single
Pulse Output Mode then the PTMn output pin will be reset to its initial condition, as
specified by the PTnOC bit, when the PTnON bit changes from low to high.
Bit 2~0
Rev. 1.00
Unimplemented, read as "0"
88
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
PTMnC1 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
Name
PTnM1
PTnM0
PTnIO1
PTnIO0
PTnOC
2
1
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PTnPOL PTnCAPTS PTnCCLR
Bit 7~6PTnM1~PTnM0: Select PTMn Operating Mode
00: Compare Match Output Mode
01: Capture Input Mode
10: PWM Output Mode or Single Pulse Output Mode
11: Timer/Counter Mode
These bits setup the required operating mode for the PTMn. To ensure reliable
operation the PTMn should be switched off before any changes are made to the
PTnM1 and PTnM0 bits. In the Timer/Counter Mode, the PTMn output pin state is
undefined.
Bit 5~4PTnIO1~PTnIO0: Select PTMn pin PTPn or PTCKn function
Compare Match Output Mode
00: No change
01: Output low
10: Output high
11: Toggle output
PWM Output Mode/Single Pulse Output Mode
00: PWM Output inactive state
01: PWM Output active state
10: PWM output
11: Single pulse output
Capture Input Mode
00: Input capture at rising edge of PTPn or PTCKn
01: Input capture at falling edge of PTPn or PTCKn
10: Input capture at falling/rising edge of PTPn or PTCKn
11: Input capture disabled
Timer/Counter Mode
Unused
These two bits are used to determine how the PTMn output pin changes state when a
certain condition is reached. The function that these bits select depends upon in which
mode the PTMn is running.
In the Compare Match Output Mode, the PTnIO1 and PTnIO0 bits determine how the
PTMn output pin changes state when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A.
The PTMn output pin can be setup to switch high, switch low or to toggle its present
state when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A. When the bits are both
zero, then no change will take place on the output. The initial value of the PTMn
output pin should be setup using the PTnOC bit in the PTMnC1 register. Note that
the output level requested by the PTnIO1 and PTnIO0 bits must be different from the
initial value setup using the PTnOC bit otherwise no change will occur on the PTMn
output pin when a compare match occurs. After the PTMn output pin changes state,
it can be reset to its initial level by changing the level of the PTnON bit from low to
high.
In the PWM Output Mode, the PTnIO1 and PTnIO0 bits determine how the PTMn
output pin changes state when a certain compare match condition occurs. The PWM
output function is modified by changing these two bits. It is necessary to only change
the values of the PTnIO1 and PTnIO0 bits only after the TM has been switched off.
Unpredictable PWM outputs will occur if the PTnIO1 and PTnIO0 bits are changed
when the PTMn is running.
Rev. 1.00
89
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Bit 3PTnOC: PTMn PTPn Output control bit
Compare Match Output Mode
0: Initial low
1: Initial high
PWM Output Mode/Single Pulse Output Mode
0: Active low
1: Active high
This is the output control bit for the PTMn output pin. Its operation depends upon
whether PTMn is being used in the Compare Match Output Mode or in the PWM
Output Mode/Single Pulse Output Mode. It has no effect if the PTMn is in the Timer/
Counter Mode. In the Compare Match Output Mode it determines the logic level of
the PTMn output pin before a compare match occurs. In the PWM Output Mode it
determines if the PWM signal is active high or active low.
Bit 2PTnPOL: PTMn PTPn Output polarity Control
0: Non-invert
1: Invert
This bit controls the polarity of the PTPn output pin. When the bit is set high the
PTMn output pin will be inverted and not inverted when the bit is zero. It has no effect
if the PTMn is in the Timer/Counter Mode.
Bit 1PTnCAPTS: PTMn Capture Trigger Source Selection
0: From PTPn pin
1: From PTCKn pin
Bit 0PTnCCLR: Select PTMn Counter clear condition
0: PTMn Comparator P match
1: PTMn Comparator A match
This bit is used to select the method which clears the counter. Remember that the
Periodic TM contains two comparators, Comparator A and Comparator P, either of
which can be selected to clear the internal counter. With the PTnCCLR bit set high,
the counter will be cleared when a compare match occurs from the Comparator A.
When the bit is low, the counter will be cleared when a compare match occurs from
the Comparator P or with a counter overflow. A counter overflow clearing method can
only be implemented if the CCRP bits are all cleared to zero. The PTnCCLR bit is not
used in the PWM Output Mode, Single Pulse or Capture Input Mode.
PTMnDL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~0D7~D0: PTMn Counter Low Byte Register bit 7 ~ bit 0
PTMn 10-bit Counter bit 7 ~ bit 0
PTMnDH Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
—
—
—
—
D9
D8
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
—
R
R
POR
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
Bit 7~2
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 1~0D9~D8: PTMn Counter High Byte Register bit 1 ~ bit 0
PTMn 10-bit Counter bit 9 ~ bit 8
Rev. 1.00
90
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
PTMnAL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~0D7~D0: PTMn CCRA Low Byte Register bit 7 ~ bit 0
PTMn 10-bit CCRA bit 7 ~ bit 0
PTMnAH Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
—
—
—
—
D9
D8
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
Bit 7~2
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 1~0D9~D8: PTMn CCRA High Byte Register bit 1 ~ bit 0
PTMn 10-bit CCRA bit 9 ~ bit 8
PTMnRPL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~0D7~D0: PTMn CCRP Low Byte Register bit 7 ~ bit 0
PTMn 10-bit CCRP bit 7 ~ bit 0
PTMnRPH Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
—
—
—
—
D9
D8
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
Bit 7~2
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 1~0D9~D8: PTMn CCRP High Byte Register bit 1 ~ bit 0
PTMn 10-bit CCRP bit 9 ~ bit 8
Periodic Type TM Operating Modes
The Periodic Type TM can operate in one of five operating modes, Compare Match Output Mode,
PWM Output Mode, Single Pulse Output Mode, Capture Input Mode or Timer/Counter Mode. The
operating mode is selected using the PTnM1 and PTnM0 bits in the PTMnC1 register.
Compare Match Output Mode
To select this mode, bits PTnM1 and PTnM0 in the PTMnC1 register, should be set to 00
respectively. In this mode once the counter is enabled and running it can be cleared by three
methods. These are a counter overflow, a compare match from Comparator A and a compare match
from Comparator P. When the PTnCCLR bit is low, there are two ways in which the counter can be
cleared. One is when a compare match from Comparator P, the other is when the CCRP bits are all
zero which allows the counter to overflow. Here both PTMnAF and PTMnPF interrupt request flags
for Comparator A and Comparator P respectively, will both be generated.
Rev. 1.00
91
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
If the PTnCCLR bit in the PTMnC1 register is high then the counter will be cleared when a compare
match occurs from Comparator A. However, here only the PTMnAF interrupt request flag will
be generated even if the value of the CCRP bits is less than that of the CCRA registers. Therefore
when PTnCCLR is high no PTMnPF interrupt request flag will be generated. In the Compare Match
Output Mode, the CCRA can not be cleared to zero.
If the CCRA bits are all zero, the counter will overflow when its reaches its maximum 10-bit, 3FF
Hex, value, however here the PTMnAF interrupt request flag will not be generated.
As the name of the mode suggests, after a comparison is made, the PTMn output pin, will change
state. The PTMn output pin condition however only changes state when a PTMnAF interrupt request
flag is generated after a compare match occurs from Comparator A. The PTMnPF interrupt request
flag, generated from a compare match occurs from Comparator P, will have no effect on the PTMn
output pin. The way in which the PTMn output pin changes state are determined by the condition of
the PTnIO1 and PTnIO0 bits in the PTMnC1 register. The PTMn output pin can be selected using
the PTnIO1 and PTnIO0 bits to go high, to go low or to toggle from its present condition when a
compare match occurs from Comparator A. The initial condition of the PTMn output pin, which is
setup after the PTnON bit changes from low to high, is setup using the PTnOC bit. Note that if the
PTnIO1 and PTnIO0 bits are zero then no pin change will take place.
Counter Value
Counter overflow
CCRP > 0
Counter cleared by CCRP value
CCRP=0
0x3FF
CCRP > 0
PTnCCLR = 0; PTnM[1:0] = 00
Counter
Restart
Resume
CCRP
Pause
CCRA
Stop
Time
PTnON
PTnPAU
PTnPOL
CCRP Int. Flag
PTMnPF
CCRA Int. Flag
PTMnAF
PTMn O/P Pin
Output pin set to
initial Level Low if
PTnOC=0
Output not affected by PTMnAF
flag. Remains High until reset by
PTnON bit
Output Toggle with
PTMnAF flag
Here PTnIO [1:0] = 11
Toggle Output select
Note PTnIO [1:0] = 10
Active High Output select
Output Inverts
when PTnPOL is high
Output Pin
Reset to Initial value
Output controlled by other
pin-shared function
Compare Match Output Mode – PTnCCLR=0 (n=0 or 1)
Note: 1. With PTnCCLR=0 a Comparator P match will clear the counter
2. The PTMn output pin is controlled only by the PTMnAF flag
3. The output pin is reset to its initial state by a PTnON bit rising edge
Rev. 1.00
92
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Counter Value
PTnCCLR = 1; PTnM[1:0] = 00
CCRA = 0
Counter overflow
CCRA > 0 Counter cleared by CCRA value
0x3FF
CCRA=0
Resume
CCRA
Pause
Stop
Counter Restart
CCRP
Time
PTnON
PTnPAU
PTnPOL
No PTMnAF flag
generated on
CCRA overflow
CCRA Int. Flag
PTMnAF
CCRP Int. Flag
PTMnPF
PTMn O/P Pin
PTMnPF
not
generated
Output pin set
to initial Level
Low if
PTnOC=0
Output does
not change
Output Toggle with
PTMnAF flag
Here PTnIO [1:0] = 11
Toggle Output select
Output not affected by
PTMnAF flag. Remains High
until reset by PTnON bit
Note PTnIO [1:0] = 10
Active High Output select
Output Inverts
when PTnPOL is high
Output Pin
Reset to Initial value
Output controlled by other
pin-shared function
Compare Match Output Mode – PTnCCLR=1 (n=0 or 1)
Note: 1. With PTnCCLR=1 a Comparator A match will clear the counter
2. The PTMn output pin is controlled only by the PTMnAF flag
3. The output pin is reset to its initial state by a PTnON bit rising edge
4. A PTMnPF flag is not generated when PTnCCLR=1
Rev. 1.00
93
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Timer/Counter Mode
To select this mode, bits PTnM1 and PTnM0 in the PTMnC1 register should be set to 11
respectively. The Timer/Counter Mode operates in an identical way to the Compare Match Output
Mode generating the same interrupt flags. The exception is that in the Timer/Counter Mode the
TM output pin is not used. Therefore the above description and Timing Diagrams for the Compare
Match Output Mode can be used to understand its function. As the TM output pin is not used in this
mode, the pin can be used as a normal I/O pin or other pin-shared function.
PWM Output Mode
To select this mode, bits PTnM1 and PTnM0 in the PTMnC1 register should be set to 10
respectively. The PWM function within the PTMn is useful for applications which require functions
such as motor control, heating control, illumination control etc. By providing a signal of fixed
frequency but of varying duty cycle on the PTMn output pin, a square wave AC waveform can be
generated with varying equivalent DC RMS values.
As both the period and duty cycle of the PWM waveform can be controlled, the choice of generated
waveform is extremely flexible. In the PWM Output Mode, the PTnCCLR bit has no effect on the
PWM operation. Both of the CCRA and CCRP registers are used to generate the PWM waveform,
one register is used to clear the internal counter and thus control the PWM waveform frequency,
while the other one is used to control the duty cycle. The PWM waveform frequency and duty cycle
can therefore be controlled by the values in the CCRA and CCRP registers.
An interrupt flag, one for each of the CCRA and CCRP, will be generated when a compare match
occurs from either Comparator A or Comparator P. The PTnOC bit in the PTMnC1 register is used
to select the required polarity of the PWM waveform while the two PTnIO1 and PTnIO0 bits are
used to enable the PWM output or to force the PTMn output pin to a fixed high or low level. The
PTnPOL bit is used to reverse the polarity of the PWM output waveform.
• 10-bit PTMn, PWM Output Mode, Edge-aligned Mode
CCRP
1~1023
0
Period
1~1023
1024
Duty
CCRA
If fSYS=12MHz, PTMn clock source select fSYS/4, CCRP=512 and CCRA=128,
The PTMn PWM output frequency=(fSYS/4)/512=fSYS/2048=5.8594kHz, duty=128/(2×256)=25%.
If the Duty value defined by the CCRA register is equal to or greater than the Period value, then the
PWM output duty is 100%.
Rev. 1.00
94
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Counter Value
PTnM[1:0] = 10
Counter cleared by
CCRP
Counter Reset when
PTnON returns high
CCRP
Pause
Resume
Counter Stop if
PTnON bit low
CCRA
Time
PTnON
PTnPAU
PTnPOL
CCRA Int. Flag
PTMnAF
CCRP Int. Flag
PTMnPF
PTMn O/P Pin
(PTnOC=1)
PTMn O/P Pin
(PTnOC=0)
PWM Duty Cycle
set by CCRA
PWM Period
set by CCRP
Output controlled by other
pin-shared function
PWM resumes
operation
Output Inverts
When PTnPOL = 1
PWM Output Mode (n=0 or 1)
Note: 1. Counter cleared by CCRP
2. A counter clear sets the PWM Period
3. The internal PWM function continues running even when PTnIO[1:0]=00 or 01
4. The PTnCCLR bit has no influence on PWM operation
Rev. 1.00
95
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Single Pulse Mode
To select this mode, bits PTnM1 and PTnM0 in the PTMnC1 register should be set to 10
respectively and also the PTnIO1 and PTnIO0 bits should be set to 11 respectively. The Single Pulse
Output Mode, as the name suggests, will generate a single shot pulse on the PTMn output pin.
The trigger for the pulse output leading edge is a low to high transition of the PTnON bit, which
can be implemented using the application program. However in the Single Pulse Mode, the PTnON
bit can also be made to automatically change from low to high using the external PTCKn pin,
which will in turn initiate the Single Pulse output. When the PTnON bit transitions to a high level,
the counter will start running and the pulse leading edge will be generated. The PTnON bit should
remain high when the pulse is in its active state. The generated pulse trailing edge will be generated
when the PTnON bit is cleared to zero, which can be implemented using the application program or
when a compare match occurs from Comparator A.
However a compare match from Comparator A will also automatically clear the PTnON bit and thus
generate the Single Pulse output trailing edge. In this way the CCRA value can be used to control the
pulse width. A compare match from Comparator A will also generate a PTMn interrupt. The counter
can only be reset back to zero when the PTnON bit changes from low to high when the counter
restarts. In the Single Pulse Mode CCRP is not used. The PTnCCLR bit is not used in this Mode.
S/W Command
SET“PTnON
or ”
PTCKn Pin
Transition
CCRA
Leading Edge
CCRA
Trailing Edge
PTnON bit
0à1
PTnON bit
1à0
S/W Command
CLR“PTnON”
or
CCRA Compare
Match
PTPn Output Pin
Pulse Width = CCRA Value
Single Pulse Generation (n=0 or 1)
Rev. 1.00
96
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Counter Value
PTnM[1:0] = 10 ; PTnIO[1:0] = 11
Counter stopped by
CCRA
Counter Reset when
PTnON returns high
CCRA
Pause
Counter Stops by
software
Resume
CCRP
Time
PTnON
Software
Trigger
Auto. set by
PTCKn pin
Software
Trigger
Cleared by
CCRA match
PTCKn pin
Software
Trigger
Software
Software Trigger
Clear
PTCKn pin
Trigger
PTnPAU
PTnPOL
CCRP Int. Flag
PTMnPF
No CCRP Interrupts
generated
CCRA Int. Flag
PTMnAF
PTMn O/P Pin
(PTnOC=1)
PTMn O/P Pin
(PTnOC=0)
Output Inverts
when PTnPOL = 1
Pulse Width set
by CCRA
Single Pulse Mode (n=0 or 1)
Note: 1. Counter stopped by CCRA
2. CCRP is not used
3. The pulse is triggered by the PTCKn pin or by setting the PTnON bit high
4. A PTCKn pin active edge will automatically set the PTnON bit high
5. In the Single Pulse Mode, PTnIO[1:0] must be set to "11" and cannot be changed.
Rev. 1.00
97
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Capture Input Mode
To select this mode bits PTnM1 and PTnM0 in the PTMnC1 register should be set to 01
respectively. This mode enables external signals to capture and store the present value of the internal
counter and can therefore be used for applications such as pulse width measurements. The external
signal is supplied on the PTPn or PTCKn pin which is selected using the PTnCAPTS bit in the
PTMnC1 register. The input pin active edge can be either a rising edge, a falling edge or both rising
and falling edges; the active edge transition type is selected using the PTnIO1 and PTnIO0 bits in
the PTMnC1 register. The counter is started when the PTnON bit changes from low to high which is
initiated using the application program.
When the required edge transition appears on the PTPn or PTCKn pin the present value in the
counter will be latched into the CCRA registers and a PTMn interrupt generated. Irrespective of
what events occur on the PTPn or PTCKn pin, the counter will continue to free run until the PTnON
bit changes from high to low. When a CCRP compare match occurs the counter will reset back to
zero; in this way the CCRP value can be used to control the maximum counter value. When a CCRP
compare match occurs from Comparator P, a PTMn interrupt will also be generated. Counting the
number of overflow interrupt signals from the CCRP can be a useful method in measuring long
pulse widths. The PTnIO1 and PTnIO0 bits can select the active trigger edge on the PTPn or PTCKn
pin to be a rising edge, falling edge or both edge types. If the PTnIO1 and PTnIO0 bits are both set
high, then no capture operation will take place irrespective of what happens on the PTPn or PTCKn
pin, however it must be noted that the counter will continue to run.
As the PTPn or PTCKn pin is pin shared with other functions, care must be taken if the PTMn is in
the Capture Input Mode. This is because if the pin is setup as an output, then any transitions on this
pin may cause an input capture operation to be executed. The PTnCCLR, PTnOC and PTnPOL bits
are not used in this Mode.
Rev. 1.00
98
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Counter Value
PTnM[1:0] = 01
Counter cleared by
CCRP
Counter
Stop
Counter
Reset
CCRP
YY
Resume
Pause
XX
Time
PTnON
PTnPAU
Active
edge
Active
edge
Active edge
PTMn Capture Pin
PTPn or PTCKn
CCRA Int. Flag
PTMnAF
CCRP Int. Flag
PTMnPF
CCRA Value
PTnIO [1:0] Value
00 - Rising edge
XX
YY
XX
01 - Falling edge 10 - Both edges
YY
11 - Disable Capture
Capture Input Mode (n=0 or 1)
Note: 1. PTnM[1:0]=01 and active edge set by the PTnIO[1:0] bits
2. A PTMn Capture input pin active edge transfers the counter value to CCRA
3. PTnCCLR bit not used
4. No output function – PTnOC and PTnPOL bits are not used
5. CCRP determines the counter value and the counter has a maximum count value when
CCRP is equal to zero.
Rev. 1.00
99
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Nebuliser Resonance Detector
Please refer Holtek Applicatoin Notes.
Water Shortage Protection
Please refer Holtek Applicatoin Notes.
Over Current/Voltage Protection
The device includes an over current/voltage protection function which provides an over current or over
voltage protection protection mechanism for applications. The OCVPAI0 input signal can be converted
to a relevant voltage level according to the current value using the OCVP operational amplifier. It
is then compared with a reference voltage generated by an 8-bit D/A converter. The voltage on the
OCVPCI pin is compared with a reference voltage generated by the 8-bit D/A converter. When the
OCVPF flag changes from 0 to 1 and if the corresponding interrupt control is enabled, an OCVP
interrupt will be generated to indicate a specific current or voltage condition has occurred.
VREF
VDD
OCVPEN
OCVPDA[7:0]
8-bit
DAC
OCVPVRS
S0
OCVPAI0
OCVPCOUT
OCVPEN
S2
fDEB=fSYS
S3
CMP
OCVPS[2:0]
S4
S5
OCVPO
OCVPEN
S1
Debounce
OPA
R1
OCVPINT
OCVPSPOL
OCVPCI
OCVPCHY
2kΩ or 4kΩ
OCVPDEB[2:0]
OCVPCPS
OCVPG2XEN
S6
OCVPSWn
(n=0~6)
S7
OCVPSW7
R2
OCVPAO
OCVPG[2:0]
OCVP Block Diagram
OCVP Operation
The OCVP circuit is used to prevent the input current or voltage from being in an unexpected level
range. The current on the OCVPAI0 pin is converted to a voltage and then amplified by the OCVP
operational amplifier with a programmable gain from 1 to 65 selected by the OCVPG2~OCVPG0
bits in the OCVPC2 register. This is known as the Programmable Gain Amplifier or PGA. This
PGA can also be configured to operate in the non-inverting, inverting or input offset calibration
mode determined by the OCVPSW7~OCVPSW0 bits in the OCVPC0 register. After the current
is converted and amplified to a specific voltage level, it will be compared with a reference voltage
provided by an 8-bit D/A converter. The voltage on the OCVPCI pin is also can be selected to
compare with a reference provided by the 8-bit D/A converter.
To compare the OCVPAO output signal or the OCVPCI input signal with the D/A converter output
voltage is selected using the OCVPCPS bit in the OCVPC1 register. The 8-bit D/A converter power
can be supplied by the external power pin, VDD or VREF, selected by the OCVPVRS bit in the
OCVPC1 register. The comparator output, OCVPCOUT, will first be filtered with a certain debounce time period selected by the OCVPDEB2~OCVPDEB0 bits in the OCVPC2 register. Then
a filtered OCVP digital comparator output, OCVPO, is obtained to indicate whether a user-defined
Rev. 1.00
100
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
current or voltage condition occurs or not.
If the OCVPSPOL bit is cleared to 0 and the comparator inputs force the OCVPO bit to change
from 0 to 1, or if the OCVPSPOL bit is set to 1 and the comparator inputs force the OCVPO bit
changes from 1 to 0, the corresponding interrupt will be generated if the relevant interrupt control
bit is enabled. It is important to note that, only an OCVPINT rising edge can trigger an OCVP
interrupt request, so the OCVPSPOL bit must be properly configured according to user’s application
requirements. The comparator in the OCVP circuit also has hysteresis function controlled by
OCVPCHY bit.
Note that the debounce clock, fDEB, comes from the system clock, fSYS. The operational amplifier
output voltage also can be read out by means of another A/D converter from the OCVPAO signal.
The DAC output voltage is controlled by the OCVPDA register and the DAC output is defined as
below:
DAC VOUT=(DAC reference voltage/256) × D[7:0]
OCVP Control Registers
Overall operation of the OCVP function is controlled using several registers. The CTRL2 register
is used to select the OCVPAI0 input signal source pin. One register is used to provide the reference
voltages for the OCVP circuit. Two registers are used for the operational amplifier and comparator
input offset calibration. The remaining three registers are control registers which control the
OCVP function, D/A converter reference voltage select, switches on/off control, PGA gain select,
comparator non-inverting input select, comparator de-bounce time, comparator hysteresis function
and comparator output polarity control, etc. For a more detailed description regarding the input
offset voltage calibration procedures, refer to the corresponding input offset calibration sections.
Bit
Register
Name
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CTRL2
—
—
—
—
—
OCVPS2
OCVPS1
OCVPS0
OCVPDA
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
OCVPC0
OCVPSW7
OCVPSW6
OCVPSW5
OCVPSW4
OCVPSW3
OCVPSW2
OCVPSW1
OCVPSW0
OCVPC1
OCVPEN
OCVPCHY
OCVPO
OCVPSPOL
—
—
OCVPCPS
OCVPVRS
OCVPC2
—
OCVPG2XEN
OCVPG2
OCVPG1
OCVPG0
OCVPDEB2
OCVPDEB1
OCVPDEB0
OCVPOCAL OCVPOOFM OCVPORSP OCVPOOF5 OCVPOOF4 OCVPOOF3 OCVPOOF2 OCVPOOF1 OCVPOOF0
OCVPCCAL OCVPCOUT
OCVPCOFM OCVPCRSP OCVPCOF4
OCVPCOF3
OCVPCOF2
OCVPCOF1
OCVPCOF0
OCVP Register List
CTRL2 Register
Rev. 1.00
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
Name
—
—
—
—
—
2
R/W
—
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
Bit 7~3
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 2~0
OCVPS2 ~ OCVPS0: OCVPAI0 signal input source pin selection
000: PB0
001: PB1
010: PB2
011: PB3
100: PA6
101: PA3
110: PA1
111: PA4
101
1
0
OCVPS2 OCVPS1 OCVPS0
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
OCVPC0 Register
Bit
Name
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OCVPSW7 OCVPSW6 OCVPSW5 OCVPSW4 OCVPSW3 OCVPSW2 OCVPSW1 OCVPSW0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
Bit 7OCVPSW7: OCVP switch S7 on/off control
0: Off
1: On
Bit 6OCVPSW6: OCVP switch S6 on/off control
0: Off
1: On
Bit 5OCVPSW5: OCVP switch S5 on/off control
0: Off
1: On
Bit 4OCVPSW4: OCVP switch S4 on/off control
0: Off
1: On
Bit 3OCVPSW3: OCVP switch S3 on/off control
0: Off
1: On
Bit 2OCVPSW2: OCVP switch S2 on/off control
0: Off
1: On
Bit 1OCVPSW1: OCVP switch S1 on/off control
0: Off
1: On
Bit 0OCVPSW0: OCVP switch S0 on/off control
0: Off
1: On
OCVPC1 Register
Bit
7
6
Name OCVPEN OCVPCHY
5
4
3
2
OCVPO
OCVPSPOL
—
—
1
0
OCVPCPS OCVPVRS
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
—
—
0
0
Bit 7OCVPEN: OCVP function enable control
0: Disable
1: Enable
When this bit is cleared to 0, the overall OCVP operation will be disabled and the
comparator output, OCVPCOUT, will be equal to 0.
Bit 6OCVPCHY: OCVP Comparator Hysteresis function control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 5OCVPO: OCVP Comparator debounce output
This bit is the debounce version of the OCVPCOUT bit.
Bit 4OCVPSPOL: OCVPO polarity control
0: Non-inverted
1: Inverted
Bit 3~2
Rev. 1.00
Unimplemented, read as "0"
102
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Bit 1OCVPCPS: OCVP Comparator non-inverting input selection
0: OCVPAO and/or OPAMP output
1: From OCVPCI pin
Bit 0OCVPVRS: OCVP D/A Converter reference voltage selection
0: From VDD
1: From VREF pin
OCVPC2 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
OCVPG2XEN
OCVPG2
OCVPG1
OCVPG0
OCVPDEB2
OCVPDEB1
OCVPDEB0
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 6OCVPG2XEN: R2/R1 ratio doubling enable control
0: Disable (R1=13.2kΩ)
1: Enable (R1=6.6kΩ)
When this bit is 1, the R2/R1 ratio selected by the OCVPG2~OCVPG0 bits will be
doubled.
Bit 5~3OCVPG2~OCVPG0: PGA R2/R1 ratio selection
When OCVPG2XEN=0:
000: R2/R1=1
001: R2/R1=4
010: R2/R1=6
011: R2/R1=10
100: R2/R1=15
101: R2/R1=25
110: R2/R1=40
111: R2/R1=65
When OCVPG2XEN=1:
000: R2/R1=2
001: R2/R1=8
010: R2/R1=12
011: R2/R1=20
100: R2/R1=30
101: R2/R1=50
110: R2/R1=80
111: R2/R1=130
The calculating formula of the PGA gain for the inverting and non-inverting mode is
described in the “Input Voltage Range” section.
Note that the internal resistors, R1 and R2, should be used when the gain is determined
by these bits. This means the S4 or S5 switch together with the S7 switch should be
on. Otherwise, the gain accuracy will not be guaranteed.
Bit 2~0OCVPDEB2~OCVPDEB0: OCVP Comparator output debounce time control
000: Bypass, no debounce
001: (1~2) × tDEB
010: (3~4) × tDEB
011: (7~8) × tDEB
100: (15~16) × tDEB
101: (31~32) × tDEB
110: (63~64) × tDEB
111: (127~128) × tDEB
Note: fDEB=fSYS, tDEB=1/fDEB
Rev. 1.00
103
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
OCVPDA Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7~0
OCVP D/A Converter Data Register bit 7 ~ bit 0
OCVP D/A Converter Output=(DAC reference voltage/256) × D[7:0]
OCVPOCAL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name OCVPOOFM OCVPORSP OCVPOOF5 OCVPOOF4 OCVPOOF3 OCVPOOF2 OCVPOOF1 OCVPOOF0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7OCVPOOFM: OCVP Operational Amplifier operating mode selection
0: Normal operating mode
1: Offset calibration mode
This bit is used to select the OCVP operating mode. To select the operational amplifier
input offset calibration mode, the OCVPSW7~OCVPSW0 bits must first be set to 28H
and then the OCVPOOFM bit must be set to 1 followed by the OCVPCOFM bit being
cleared to 0. Refer to the "Operational Amplifier Input Offset Calibration" section for
the detailed offset calibration procedures.
Bit 6OCVPORSP: OCVP Operational Amplifier input offset voltage calibration reference
selection
0: Operational amplifier inverting input is selected
1: Operational amplifier non-verting input is selected
OCVPOOF5~OCVPOOF0: OCVP Operational Amplifier input offset voltage calibration
value
This 6-bit field is used to perform the operational amplifier input offset calibration
operation and the value for the OCVP operational amplifier input offset calibration
can be restored into this bit field. More detailed information is described in the
"Operational Amplifier Input Offset Calibration" section.
Bit 5~0
OCVPCCAL Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name OCVPCOUT OCVPCOFM OCVPCRSP OCVPCOF4 OCVPCOF3 OCVPCOF2 OCVPCOF1 OCVPCOF0
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
Bit 7OCVPCOUT: OCVP Comparator output
0: Non-verting input voltage < DAC output voltage
1: Non-verting input voltage > DAC output voltage
This bit is used to indicate whether the non-verting input voltage is greater than the
DAC output voltage. If the OCVPCOUT is set to 1, the non-verting input voltage is
greater than the DAC output voltage. Otherwise, the non-verting input voltage is less
than the DAC output voltage. This bit value can be output on the OCVPCOUT pin.
Bit 6OCVPCOFM: OCVP Comparator operating mode selection
0: Normal operating mode
1: Offset calibration mode
This bit is used to select the OCVP comparator operating mode. To select the
comparator input offset calibration mode, the OCVPSW7~OCVPSW0 bits must
first be set to 28H and then the OCVPCOFM bit must be set to 1 followed by
the OCVPOOFM bit being cleared to 0. Refer to the "Comparator Input Offset
Calibration" section for the detailed offset calibration procedures.
Rev. 1.00
104
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Bit 5OCVPCRSP: OCVP Comparator input offset voltage calibration reference selection
0: Inverting input as the reference input
1: Non-inverting input is selected as the reference input
Bit 4~0OCVPCOF4~OCVPCOF0: OCVP Comparator input offset voltage calibration value
This 5-bit field is used to perform the comparator input offset calibration operation
and the value for the OCVP comparator input offset calibration can be restored into
this bit field. More detailed information is described in the "Comparator Input Offset
Calibration" section.
Input Voltage Range
Together with different PGA operating modes, the input voltage can be positive or negative to provide
diverse applications for the device. The PGA output for the positive or negative input voltage is
respectively calculated based on different formulas and described by the following examples.
• For VIN > 0, the PGA operates in the non-inverting mode and the PGA output is obtained using
the formula below:
VOUT = (1 +
R2
) x VIN
R1
• When the PGA operates in the non-inverting mode, a unity gain buffer is provided. If
OCVPSW6~OCVPSW4 bits are set to "000", the PGA gain will be 1 and the PGA will act as a unity
gain buffer. The switches S6, S5 and S4 will be off internally and the output voltage of PGA is:
VOUT = VIN
• If S3 and S4 are on, the input node is OCVPAI0. For input voltage 0 >VIN >-0.4, the PGA operates
in the inverting mode and the PGA output is obtained using the formula below. Note that if the
input voltage VIN is negative, it can not be lower than -0.4V which will result in current leakage.
VOUT = −
R2
x VIN
R1
Offset Calibration
To operate in the input offset calibration mode for the OCVP circuit, the OCVPSW7~OCVPSW0
bits should first be set to 28H. For operational amplifier and comparator input offset calibration, the
procedures are similar except for setting the respective control bits.
Operational Amplifier Input Offset Calibration
Step 1. Set OCVPSW [7:0]=28H (S3 and S5 are on, other switches are off), OCVPOOFM=1,
OCVPCOFM=0 and OCVPORSP=1, OCVPCPS=0, the OCVP will operate in the
operational amplifier input offset calibration mode.
Step 2. Set OCVPDA [7:0]=40H
Step 3. Set OCVPOOF [5:0]=000000 and read the OCVPCOUT bit.
Step 4. Increase the OCVPOOF [5:0] value by 1 and then read the OCVPCOUT bit.
If the OCVPCOUT bit state has not changed, then repeat Step 4 until the OCVPCOUT bit
state has changed.
If the OCVPCOUT bit state has changed, record the OCVPOOF value as VOOS1 and then
go to Step 5.
Step 5. Set OCVPOOF [5:0]=111111 and read the OCVPCOUT bit.
Rev. 1.00
105
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Step 6. Decrease the OCVPOOF [5:0] value by 1 and then read the OCVPCOUT bit.
If the OCVPCOUT bit state has not changed, then repeat Step 6 until the OCVPCOUT bit
state has changed.
If the OCVPCOUT bit state has changed, record the OCVPOOF value as VOOS2 and then
go to Step 7.
Step 7. Restore the operational amplifier input offset calibration value VOOS into the OCVPOOF
[5:0] bit field. The offset calibration procedure is now finished.
Where VOOS = VOOS1 + VOOS2
2
Comparator input Offset Calibration
Before the offset calibration, the hysteresis voltage should be zero by setting the OCVPCHY bit to 0.
Step 1. Set OCVPSW [7:0]=28H, OCVPCOFM=1, OCVPOOFM=0 and OCVPCRSP=0, the OCVP
will now operate in the comparator input offset calibration mode.
Step 2. Set OCVPDA [7:0]=40H
Step 3. Set OCVPCOF [4:0]=00000 and read the OCVPCOUT bit.
Step 4. Increase the OCVPCOF [4:0] value by 1 and then read the OCVPCOUT bit.
If the OCVPCOUT bit state has not changed, then repeat Step 4 until the OCVPCOUT bit
state has changed.
If the OCVPCOUT bit state has changed, record the OCVPCOF value as VCOS1 and then
go to Step 5.
Step 5. Set OCVPCOF [4:0]=11111 and read the OCVPCOUT bit.
Step 6. Decrease the OCVPCOF [4:0] value by 1 and then read the OCVPCOUT bit.
If the OCVPCOUT bit state has not changed, then repeat Step 6 until the OCVPCOUT bit
state has changed.
If the OCVPCOUT bit state has changed, record the OCVPCOF value as VCOS2 and then
go to Step 7.
Step 7. Restore the comparator input offset calibration value VCOS into the OCVPCOF [4:0] bit
field. The offset calibration procedure is now finished.
Where VCOS = VCOS1 + VCOS2
2
Rev. 1.00
106
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
I2C Interface
The I 2C interface is used to communicate with external peripheral devices such as sensors,
EEPROM memory etc. Originally developed by Philips, it is a two line low speed serial interface
for synchronous serial data transfer. The advantage of only two lines for communication, relatively
simple communication protocol and the ability to accommodate multiple devices on the same bus
has made it an extremely popular interface type for many applications.
VDD
SDA
SCL
Device
Slave
Device
�aster
Device
Slave
I2C Master/Slave Bus Connection
I2C Interface Operation
The I2C serial interface is a two line interface, a serial data line, SDA, and serial clock line, SCL. As
many devices may be connected together on the same bus, their outputs are both open drain types.
For this reason it is necessary that external pull-high resistors are connected to these outputs. Note
that no chip select line exists, as each device on the I2C bus is identified by a unique address which
will be transmitted and received on the I2C bus.
When two devices communicate with each other on the bidirectional I2C bus, one is known as the
master device and one as the slave device. Both master and slave can transmit and receive data,
however, it is the master device that has overall control of the bus. For this device, which only
operates in slave mode, there are two methods of transferring data on the I2C bus, the slave transmit
mode and the slave receive mode.
Data Bus
I2C Data Register
(IICD)
fSYS
SCL Pin
SDA Pin
HTX
Debounce
Circuitry
IICDEB[1:0]
Address Address Match–HAAS
Comparator
Direction Control
Data in MSB
M
U
X
Shift Register
Read/Write Slave
I2C Interrupt
SRW
Data out MSB
TXAK
Transmit/
Receive
Control Unit
fSUB
IICTOEN
I2C Address Register
(IICA)
8-bit Data Transfer Complete–HCF
Detect Start or Stop
HBB
IICTOF
Time-out
Control
Address Match
I2C Block Diagram
Rev. 1.00
107
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
START signal
from �aster
Send slave address
and R/W bit from �aster
Acknowledge
from slave
Send data b�te
from �aster
Acknowledge
from slave
STOP signal
from �aster
The IICDEB1 and IICDEB0 bits determine the debounce time of the I2C interface. This uses the
system clock to in effect add a debounce time to the external clock to reduce the possibility of
glitches on the clock line causing erroneous operation. The debounce time, if selected, can be
chosen to be either 2 or 4 system clocks. To achieve the required I2C data transfer speed, there
exists a relationship between the system clock, fSYS, and the I2C debounce time. For either the I2C
Standard or Fast mode operation, users must take care of the selected system clock frequency and
the configured debounce time to match the criterion shown in the following table.
I2C Debounce Time Selection
I2C Standard Mode (100kHz)
I2C Fast Mode (400kHz)
No Debounce
fSYS > 2MHz
fSYS > 5MHz
2 system clocks debounce
fSYS > 4MHz
fSYS > 10MHz
fSYS > 8MHz
fSYS > 20MHz
4 system clocks debounce
I C Minimum fSYS Frequency
2
I2C Registers
There are three control registers associated with the I2C bus, IICC0, IICC1 and IICTOC, and one
slave address register, IICA, together with one data register, IICD.
Bit
Register
Name
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IICC0
—
—
—
—
IICDEB1
IICDEB0
IICEN
—
IICC1
HCF
HAAS
HBB
HTX
TXAK
SRW
IAMWU
RXAK
IICD
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
IICA
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
—
IICTOC
IICTOEN
IICTOF
IICTOS5
IICTOS4
IICTOS3
IICTOS2
IICTOS1
IICTOS0
I2C Register List
Rev. 1.00
108
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
IICD Register
The IICD register is used to store the data being transmitted and received on the I2C bus. Before the
microcontroller writes data to the I2C bus, the actual data to be transmitted must be placed in the IICD
register. After the data is received from the I2C bus, the microcontroller can read it from the IICD
register. Any transmission or reception of data from the I2C bus must be made via the IICD register.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
"x": unknown
Bit 7~0D7~D0: I2C Data Buffer bit 7~bit 0
IICA Register
The IICA register is the location where the 7-bit slave address of the slave device is stored. Bits 7~
1 of the IICA register define the device slave address. Bit 0 is not defined. When a master device,
which is connected to the I2C bus, sends out an address, which matches the slave address in the IICA
register, the slave device will be selected.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
Bit 7~1A6~A0: I2C slave address
A6~ A0 is the I2C slave address bit 6 ~ bit 0.
Bit 0
Unimplemented, read as "0"
I2C Control Registers
There are two control registers for the I2C interface, IICC0 and IICC1. The register IICC0 is
used to control the enable/disable function and to set the data transmission clock frequency. The
IICC1 register contains the relevant flags which are used to indicate the I2C communication status.
Another register, IICTOC, is used to control the I2C time-out function and will be described in the
corresponding section.
• IICC0 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
—
—
IICDEB1
IICDEB0
IICEN
—
R/W
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
POR
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
—
Bit 7~4
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 3~2IICDEB1~IICDEB0: I2C debounce time selection
00: No debounce
01: 2 system clocks debounce
10: 4 system clocks debounce
11: 4 system clocks debounce
Rev. 1.00
109
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Bit 1IICEN: I2C interface enable control
0: Disable
1: Enable
The bit is the overall on/off control for the I2C interface. When the IICEN bit is cleared
to zero to disable the I2C interface, the SDA and SCL lines will lose their I2C function
and the I2C operating current will be reduced to a minimum value. When the bit is
set high the I2C interface is enabled. If the IICEN bit changes from low to high, the
contents of the I2C control bits such as HTX and TXAK will remain at the previous
settings and should therefore be first initialised by the application program while the
relevant I2C flags such as HCF, HAAS, HBB, SRW and RXAK will be set to their
default states.
Bit 0
Unimplemented, read as "0"
• IICC1 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
HCF
HAAS
HBB
HTX
TXAK
SRW
IAMWU
RXAK
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R
POR
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Bit 7HCF: I2C Bus data transfer completion flag
0: Data is being transferred
1: Completion of an 8-bit data transfer
The HCF flag is the data transfer flag. This flag will be zero when data is being
transferred. Upon completion of an 8-bit data transfer the flag will go high and an
interrupt will be generated.
Below is an example of the flow of a two-byte I2C data transfer:
First, I2C slave device receive a start signal from I2C master and then HCF bit is
automatically cleared to zero.
Second, I2C slave device finish receiving the 1st data byte and then HCF bit is
automatically set to one.
Third, user read the 1st data byte from IICD register by the application program and
then HCF bit is automatically cleared to zero.
Fourth, I2C slave device finish receiving the 2nd data byte and then HCF bit is
automatically set to one and so on.
Finally, I2C slave device receive a stop signal from I2C master and then HCF bit is
automatically set to one.
Bit 6HAAS: I2C Bus address match flag
0: Not address match
1: Address match
The HAAS flag is the address match flag. This flag is used to determine if the slave
device address is the same as the master transmit address. If the addresses match then
this bit will be high, if there is no match then the flag will be low.
Bit 5HBB: I2C Bus busy flag
0: I2C Bus is not busy
1: I2C Bus is busy
The HBB flag is the I2C busy flag. This flag will be "1" when the I2C bus is busy which
will occur when a START signal is detected. The flag will be set to "0" when the bus is
free which will occur when a STOP signal is detected.
Rev. 1.00
110
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Bit 4HTX: Select I2C slave device is transmitter or receiver
0: Slave device is the receiver
1: Slave device is the transmitter
Bit 3TXAK: I2C Bus transmit acknowledge flag
0: Slave send acknowledge flag
1: Slave do not send acknowledge flag
The TXAK bit is the transmit acknowledge flag. After the slave device receipt of 8-bits
of data, this bit will be transmitted to the bus on the 9th clock from the slave device.
The slave device must always set TXAK bit to "0" before further data is received.
Bit 2SRW: I2C Slave Read/Write flag
0: Slave device should be in receive mode
1: Slave device should be in transmit mode
The SRW flag is the I 2C Slave Read/Write flag. This flag determines whether
the master device wishes to transmit or receive data from the I2C bus. When the
transmitted address and slave address is match, that is when the HAAS flag is set high,
the slave device will check the SRW flag to determine whether it should be in transmit
mode or receive mode. If the SRW flag is high, the master is requesting to read data
from the bus, so the slave device should be in transmit mode. When the SRW flag
is zero, the master will write data to the bus, therefore the slave device should be in
receive mode to read this data.
Bit 1IAMWU: I2C Address Match Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
This bit should be set to 1 to enable the I2C address match wake up from the SLEEP
or IDLE Mode. If the IAMWU bit has been set before entering either the SLEEP or
IDLE mode to enable the I2C address match wake up, then this bit must be cleared by
the application program after wake-up to ensure correction device operation.
Bit 0RXAK: I2C Bus Receive acknowledge flag
0: Slave receive acknowledge flag
1: Slave donot receive acknowledge flag
The RXAK flag is the receiver acknowledge flag. When the RXAK flag is "0", it
means that a acknowledge signal has been received at the 9th clock, after 8 bits of data
have been transmitted. When the slave device in the transmit mode, the slave device
checks the RXAK flag to determine if the master receiver wishes to receive the next
byte. The slave transmitter will therefore continue sending out data until the RXAK
flag is "1". When this occurs, the slave transmitter will release the SDA line to allow
the master to send a STOP signal to release the I2C Bus.
Rev. 1.00
111
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
I2C Bus Communication
Communication on the I2C bus requires four separate steps, a START signal, a slave device address
transmission, a data transmission and finally a STOP signal. When a START signal is placed on
the I2C bus, all devices on the bus will receive this signal and be notified of the imminent arrival of
data on the bus. The first seven bits of the data will be the slave address with the first bit being the
MSB. If the address of the slave device matches that of the transmitted address, the HAAS bit in the
IICC1 register will be set and an I2C interrupt will be generated. After entering the interrupt service
routine, the slave device must first check the condition of the HAAS and IICTOF bits to determine
whether the interrupt source originates from an address match or from the completion of an 8-bit
data transfer completion or I2C bus time-out occurrence. During a data transfer, note that after the
7-bit slave address has been transmitted, the following bit, which is the 8th bit, is the read/write bit
whose value will be placed in the SRW bit. This bit will be checked by the slave device to determine
whether to go into transmit or receive mode. Before any transfer of data to or from the I2C bus, the
microcontroller must initialise the bus, the following are steps to achieve this:
• Step 1
Set IICEN bit in the IICC0 register to "1" to enable the I2C bus.
• Step 2
Write the slave address of the device to the I2C bus address register IICA.
• Step 3
Set the IICE and I2C multi-function interrupt enable bit of the interrupt control register to enable
the I2C interrupt and the multi-function interrupt.
Start
SET IICEN
Write Slave
Address to IICA
No
I2C Bus
Interrupt=?
Yes
CLR IICE
Poll IICF to decide
when to go to I2C Bus ISR
SET IICE and MFnE
Wait for Interrupt
Go to Main Program
Go to Main Program
I2C Bus Initialisation Flow Chart
Rev. 1.00
112
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
I2C Bus Start Signal
The START signal can only be generated by the master device connected to the I2C bus and not by
the slave device. This START signal will be detected by all devices connected to the I2C bus. When
detected, this indicates that the I2C bus is busy and therefore the HBB bit will be set. A START
condition occurs when a high to low transition on the SDA line takes place when the SCL line
remains high.
Slave Address
The transmission of a START signal by the master will be detected by all devices on the I2C bus.
To determine which slave device the master wishes to communicate with, the address of the slave
device will be sent out immediately following the START signal. All slave devices, after receiving
this 7-bit address data, will compare it with their own 7-bit slave address. If the address sent out by
the master matches the internal address of the microcontroller slave device, then an internal I2C bus
interrupt signal will be generated. The next bit following the address, which is the 8th bit, defines
the read/write status and will be saved to the SRW bit of the IICC1 register. The slave device will
then transmit an acknowledge bit, which is a low level, as the 9th bit. The slave device will also set
the status flag HAAS when the addresses match.
As an I2C bus interrupt can come from three sources, when the program enters the interrupt
subroutine, the HAAS and IICTOF bits should be examined to see whether the interrupt source has
come from a matching slave address or from the completion of a data byte transfer or I2C time-out.
When a slave address is matched, the device must be placed in either the transmit mode and then
write data to the IICD register, or in the receive mode where it must implement a dummy read from
the IICD register to release the SCL line.
I2C Bus Read/Write Signal
The SRW bit in the IICC1 register defines whether the master device to read data from the I2C bus
or write data to the I2C bus. The slave device should examine this bit to determine if it is to be a
transmitter or a receiver. If the SRW flag is "1" then this indicates that the master device wishes to
read data from the I2C bus, therefore the slave device must be setup to send data to the I2C bus as a
transmitter. If the SRW flag is "0" then this indicates that the master wishes to send data to the I2C
bus, therefore the slave device must be setup to read data from the I2C bus as a receiver.
I2C Bus Slave Address Acknowledge Signal
After the master has transmitted a calling address, any slave device on the I 2C bus, whose
own internal address matches the calling address, must generate an acknowledge signal. The
acknowledge signal will inform the master that a slave device has accepted its calling address. If no
acknowledge signal is received by the master then a STOP signal must be transmitted by the master
to end the communication. When the HAAS flag is high, the addresses have matched and the slave
device must check the SRW flag to determine if it is to be a transmitter or a receiver. If the SRW
flag is high, the slave device should be setup to be a transmitter so the HTX bit in the IICC1 register
should be set to "1". If the SRW flag is low, then the microcontroller slave device should be setup as
a receiver and the HTX bit in the IICC1 register should be set to "0".
Rev. 1.00
113
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
I2C Bus Data and Acknowledge Signal
The transmitted data is 8-bits wide and is transmitted after the slave device has acknowledged
receipt of its slave address. The order of serial bit transmission is the MSB first and the LSB last.
After receipt of 8-bits of data, the receiver must transmit an acknowledge signal, level "0", before
it can receive the next data byte. If the slave transmitter does not receive an acknowledge bit signal
from the master receiver, then the slave transmitter will release the SDA line to allow the master
to send a STOP signal to release the I2C Bus. The corresponding data will be stored in the IICD
register. If setup as a transmitter, the slave device must first write the data to be transmitted into the
IICD register. If setup as a receiver, the slave device must read the transmitted data from the IICD
register.
When the slave receiver receives the data byte, it must generate an acknowledge bit, known as
TXAK, on the 9th clock. The slave device, which is setup as a transmitter will check the RXAK bit
in the IICC1 register to determine if it is to send another data byte, if not then it will release the SDA
line and await the receipt of a STOP signal from the master.
SCL
Start
Slave Address
1
SDA
0
1
1
0
1
SRW
ACK
1
0
0
Data
SCL
1
0
0
1
0
ACK
1
0
Stop
0
SDA
S=Start (1 bit)
SA=Slave Address (7 bits)
SR=SRW bit (1 bit)
M=Slave device send acknowledge bit (1 bit)
D=Data (8 bits)
A=ACK (RXAK bit for transmitter, TXAK bit for receiver, 1 bit)
P=Stop (1 bit)
S
SA SR M
D
A
D
A
……
S
SA SR M
D
A
D
A
……
P
Note: *When a slave address is matched, the device must be placed in either the transmit mode and
then write data to the IICD register, or in the receive mode where it must implement a dummy
read from the IICD register to release the I2C SCL line.
I2C Communication Timing Diagram
Rev. 1.00
114
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Start
No
No
No
Yes
HAAS=1?
Yes
HTX=1?
IICTOF=1?
Yes
Yes
SET IICTOEN
CLR IICTOF
SRW=1?
No
RETI
Read from IICD to
release SCL Line
RETI
Yes
SET HTX
CLR HTX
CLR TXAK
Write data to IICD to
release SCL Line
Dummy read from IICD
to release SCL Line
RETI
RETI
RXAK=1?
No
CLR HTX
CLR TXAK
Write data to IICD to
release SCL Line
Dummy read from IICD
to release SCL Line
RETI
RETI
I2C Bus ISR Flow Chart
I2C Time-out Control
In order to reduce the problem of I2C lockup due to reception of erroneous clock sources, a time-out
function is provided. If the clock source to the I2C is not received for a while, then the I2C circuitry
and registers will be reset after a certain time-out period. The time-out counter starts counting on an
I2C bus "START" & "address match" condition, and is cleared by an SCL falling edge. Before the
next SCL falling edge arrives, if the time elapsed is greater than the time-out setup by the IICTOC
register, then a time-out condition will occur. The time-out function will stop when an I2C "STOP"
condition occurs.
Rev. 1.00
115
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
SCL
Start
Slave Address
1
SDA
0
1
1
0
1
SRW
ACK
1
0
0
I2C time-out
counter start
Stop
SCL
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
SDA
I2C time-out counter reset
on SCL negative transition
I2C Time-out
When an I2C time-out counter overflow occurs, the counter will stop and the IICTOEN bit will be
cleared to zero and the IICTOF bit will be set high to indicate that a time-out condition has occurred.
The time-out condition will also generate an interrupt which uses the I2C interrupt vector. When an
I2C time-out occurs, the I2C internal circuitry will be reset and the registers will be reset into the
following condition:
Register
After I2C Time-out
IICD, IICA, IICC0
No changed
IICC1
Reset to POR condition
I C Registers after Time-out
2
The IICTOF flag can be cleared by the application program. There are 64 time-out periods which
can be selected using bits in the IICTOC register. The time-out time which can have a range of about
1ms to 64ms is given by the formula:
((1~64) × 32) / fSUB.
• IICTOC Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
IICTOEN
IICTOF
IICTOS5
IICTOS4
IICTOS3
IICTOS2
IICTOS1
IICTOS0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7IICTOEN: I2C Time-out function Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 6IICTOF: I2C Time-out flag (set by time-out and clear by software)
0: No time-out occurred
1: Time-out occurred
This bit is set high by time-out condition occurs and cleared to zero by software.
Bit 5~0IICTOS5~IICTOS0: Time-out period definition
I2C time-out clock source is fSUB/32.
I2C time-out time is given by: (IICTOS[5:0]+1) × (32/fSUB)
Rev. 1.00
116
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Interrupts
Interrupts are an important part of any microcontroller system. When an external event or an internal
function such as a Timer Module requires microcontroller attention, their corresponding interrupt will
enforce a temporary suspension of the main program allowing the microcontroller to direct attention
to their respective needs. The device contains several external interrupt and internal interrupt
functions. The external interrupt is generated by the action of the external INT0 and INT1 pins, while
the internal interrupts are generated by various internal functions such as the Timer Modules (TMs),
Over Current/Voltage Protection function(OCVP), Time Base, LVD, EEPROM and I2C interface.
Interrupt Registers
Overall interrupt control, which basically means the setting of request flags when certain
microcontroller conditions occur and the setting of interrupt enable bits by the application program,
is controlled by a series of registers, located in the Special Purpose Data Memory, as shown in the
accompanying table. The interrupt registers fall into three categories. The first is the INTC0~INTC2
registers which setup the primary interrupts, the second is the MFI0~MFI3 registers which setup the
Multi-function interrupts. Finally there is an INTEG register to setup the external interrupt trigger
edge type.
Each register contains a number of enable bits to enable or disable individual registers as well as
interrupt flags to indicate the presence of an interrupt request. The naming convention of these
follows a specific pattern. First is listed an abbreviated interrupt type, then the (optional) number of
that interrupt followed by either an "E" for enable/disable bit or "F" for request flag.
Enable Bit
Request Flag
Global
Function
EMI
—
—
OCVP
OCVPE
OCVPF
—
INTn Pin
INTnE
INTnF
n=0 or 1
Multi-function
MFnE
MFnF
n=0~3
Time Base
TBnE
TBnF
n=0 or 1
LVD
LVE
LVF
—
EEPROM
DEE
DEF
—
I2C
IICE
IICF
—
CTMAE
CTMAF
—
CTMPE
CTMPF
—
STMAE
STMAF
—
STMPE
STMPF
—
PTMnAE
PTMnAF
n=0 or 1
PTMnPE
PTMnPF
n=0 or 1
Timer Module
Notes
Interrupt Register Bit Naming Conventions
Bit
Register
Name
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
INTEG
—
—
—
—
INT1S1
INT1S0
INT0S1
INT0S0
INTC0
—
MF0F
INT0F
OCVPF
MF0E
INT0E
OCVPE
EMI
INTC1
TB0F
MF3F
MF2F
MF1F
TB0E
MF3E
MF2E
MF1E
INTC2
—
—
INT1F
TB1F
—
—
INT1E
TB1E
MFI0
—
—
CTMAF
CTMPF
—
—
CTMAE
CTMPE
MFI1
—
—
STMAF
STMPF
—
—
STMAE
STMPE
MFI2
PTM1AF
PTM1PF
PTM0AF
PTM0PF
PTM1AE
PTM1PE
PTM0AE
PTM0PE
MFI3
—
IICF
DEF
LVF
—
IICE
DEE
LVE
Interrupt Register List
Rev. 1.00
117
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
INTEG Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
—
—
INT1S1
INT1S0
INT0S1
INT0S0
R/W
—
—
—
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
Bit 7 ~ 4 Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 3 ~ 2
INT1S1, INT1S0: Defines INT1 interrupt active edge
00: Disabled Interrupt
01: Rising Edge Interrupt
10: Falling Edge Interrupt
11: Dual Edge Interrupt
Bit 1 ~ 0
INT0S1, INT0S0: Defines INT0 interrupt active edge
00: Disabled Interrupt
01: Rising Edge Interrupt
10: Falling Edge Interrupt
11: Dual Edge Interrupt
INTC0 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
MF0F
INT0F
OCVPF
MF0E
INT0E
OCVPE
EMI
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 6MF0F: Multi-function interrupt 0 request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 5INT0F: External interrupt 0 request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 4OCVPF: Over current/voltage protection interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 3MF0E: Multi-function interrupt 0 control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 2 INT0E: External interrupt 0 control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 1OCVPE: Over current/voltage protection interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 0EMI: Global Interrupt Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Rev. 1.00
118
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
INTC1 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
TB0F
MF3F
MF2F
MF1F
TB0E
MF3E
MF2E
MF1E
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7TB0F: Time Base 0 interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 6MF3F: Multi-function interrupt 3 request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 5MF2F: Multi-function interrupt 2 request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 4MF1F: Multi-function interrupt 1 request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 3TB0E: Time Base 0 interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 2 MF3E: Multi-function interrupt 3 control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 1MF2E: Multi-function interrupt 2 control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 0MF1E: Multi-function interrupt 1 control
0: Disable
1: Enable
INTC2 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
INT1F
TB1F
—
—
INT1E
TB1E
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
0
0
—
—
0
0
Bit 7 ~ 6 Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 5INT1F: External interrupt 1 request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 4TB1F: Time Base 1 interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 3 ~ 2
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 1 INT1E: External interrupt 1 control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 0TB1E: Time Base 1 interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Rev. 1.00
119
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
MFI0 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
CTMAF
CTMPF
—
—
CTMAE
CTMPE
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
0
0
—
—
0
0
Bit 7~6 Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 5
CTMAF: CTM comparator A match interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 4
CTMPF: CTM comparator P match interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 3~2 Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 1
CTMAE: CTM comparator A match interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 0
CTMPE: CTM comparator P match interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
MFI1 Register
Rev. 1.00
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
STMAF
STMPF
—
—
STMAE
STMPE
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
—
—
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
0
0
—
—
0
0
Bit 7 ~ 6
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 5
STMAF: STM comparator A match interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 4
STMPF: STM comparator P match interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 3 ~ 2
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 1
STMAE: STM comparator A match interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 0
STMPE: STM comparator P match interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
120
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
MFI2 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
PTM1AF
PTM1PF
PTM0AF
PTM0PF
PTM1AE
PTM1PE
PTM0AE
PTM0PE
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
PTM1AF: PTM1 comparator A match interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
PTM1PF: PTM1 comparator P match interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
PTM0AF: PTM0 comparator A match interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
PTM0PF: PTM0 comparator P match interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
PTM1AE: PTM1 comparator A match interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
PTM1PE: PTM1 comparator P match interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
PTM0AE: PTM0 comparator A match interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
PTM0PE: PTM0 comparator P match interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
MFI3 Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
IICF
DEF
LVF
—
IICE
DEE
LVE
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
0
0
0
—
0
0
0
Bit 7 Bit 6
Unimplemented, read as "0"
IICF: I2C interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 5DEF: Data EEPROM interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 4LVF: LVD interrupt request flag
0: No request
1: Interrupt request
Bit 3
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 2
IICE: I2C interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 1DEE: Data EEPROM interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 0LVE: LVD interrupt control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Rev. 1.00
121
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Interrupt Operation
When the conditions for an interrupt event occur, such as a TM Comparator P or Comparator A
match etc, the relevant interrupt request flag will be set. Whether the request flag actually generates
a program jump to the relevant interrupt vector is determined by the condition of the interrupt enable
bit. If the enable bit is set high then the program will jump to its relevant vector; if the enable bit is
zero then although the interrupt request flag is set an actual interrupt will not be generated and the
program will not jump to the relevant interrupt vector. The global interrupt enable bit, if cleared to
zero, will disable all interrupts.
When an interrupt is generated, the Program Counter, which stores the address of the next instruction
to be executed, will be transferred onto the stack. The Program Counter will then be loaded with a
new address which will be the value of the corresponding interrupt vector. The microcontroller will
then fetch its next instruction from this interrupt vector. The instruction at this vector will usually
be a "JMP" which will jump to another section of program which is known as the interrupt service
routine. Here is located the code to control the appropriate interrupt. The interrupt service routine
must be terminated with a "RETI", which retrieves the original Program Counter address from
the stack and allows the microcontroller to continue with normal execution at the point where the
interrupt occurred.
The various interrupt enable bits, together with their associated request flags, are shown in the
accompanying diagrams with their order of priority. Some interrupt sources have their own
individual vector while others share the same multi-function interrupt vector. Once an interrupt
subroutine is serviced, all the other interrupts will be blocked, as the global interrupt enable bit,
EMI bit will be cleared automatically. This will prevent any further interrupt nesting from occurring.
However, if other interrupt requests occur during this interval, although the interrupt will not be
immediately serviced, the request flag will still be recorded.
If an interrupt requires immediate servicing while the program is already in another interrupt service
routine, the EMI bit should be set after entering the routine, to allow interrupt nesting. If the stack
is full, the interrupt request will not be acknowledged, even if the related interrupt is enabled, until
the Stack Pointer is decremented. If immediate service is desired, the stack must be prevented from
becoming full. In case of simultaneous requests, the accompanying diagram shows the priority that
is applied. All of the interrupt request flags when set will wake-up the device if it is in SLEEP or
IDLE Mode, however to prevent a wake-up from occurring the corresponding flag should be set
before the device is in SLEEP or IDLE Mode.
Rev. 1.00
122
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
E�I auto disabled
in ISR
Legend
xxF
Request Flag� no auto reset in ISR
xxF
Request Flag� auto reset in ISR
xxE
Enable Bits
CT� P
CT�PF
CT�PE
CT� A
CT�AF
CT�AE
ST� P
ST�PF
ST�PE
ST� A
ST�AF
ST�AE
PT�0 P
PT�0PF
PT�0PE
PT�0 A
PT�0AF
PT�0AE
PT�1 P
PT�1PF
PT�1PE
PT�1 A
PT�1AF
PT�1AE
LVD
LVF
LVE
EEPRO�
DEF
DEE
I�C
IICF
IICE
Interrupts contained within
�ulti-Function Interrupts
Interrupt
Name
OCVP
Request
Flags
OCVPF
Enable
Bits
OCVPE
�aster
Enable
E�I
INT0 Pin
INT0F
INT0E
E�I
08H
�. Funct. 0
�F0F
�F0E
E�I
0CH
�. Funct. 1
�F1F
�F1E
E�I
10H
�. Funct. �
�F�F
�F�E
E�I
14H
�. Funct. �
�F�F
�F�E
E�I
18H
Time Base 0
TB0F
TB0E
E�I
1CH
Time Base 1
TB1F
TB1E
E�I
�0H
INT1 Pin
INT1F
INT1E
E�I
�4H
Vector
Priorit�
04H
High
Low
Interrupt Structure
External Interrupts
The external interrupts are controlled by signal transitions on the pins INT0~INT1. An external
interrupt request will take place when the external interrupt request flags, INT0F~INT1F, are set,
which will occur when a transition, whose type is chosen by the edge select bits, appears on the
external interrupt pins. To allow the program to branch to its respective interrupt vector address, the
global interrupt enable bit, EMI, and respective external interrupt enable bit, INT0E~INT1E, must
first be set. Additionally the correct interrupt edge type must be selected using the INTEG register to
enable the external interrupt function and to choose the trigger edge type. As the external interrupt
pins are pin-shared with I/O pins, they can only be configured as external interrupt pins if their
external interrupt enable bit in the corresponding interrupt register has been set. The pin must also be
setup as an input by setting the corresponding bit in the port control register as well as the relevant
pin-shared function selection bits. When the interrupt is enabled, the stack is not full and the correct
transition type appears on the external interrupt pin, a subroutine call to the external interrupt vector,
will take place. When the interrupt is serviced, the external interrupt request flags, INT0F~INT1F,
will be automatically reset and the EMI bit will be automatically cleared to disable other interrupts.
Note that any pull-high resistor selections on the external interrupt pins will remain valid even if the
pin is used as an external interrupt input.
The INTEG register is used to select the type of active edge that will trigger the external interrupt.
A choice of either rising or falling or both edge types can be chosen to trigger an external interrupt.
Note that the INTEG register can also be used to disable the external interrupt function.
Rev. 1.00
123
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
OCVP Interrupt
An OCVP interrupt request will take place when the OCVP Interrupt request flag, OCVPF, is set,
which occurs when the OCVP circuit detects a specific current or voltage condition. To allow the
program to branch to its respective interrupt vector address, the global interrupt enable bit, EMI,
and the OCVP Interrupt enable bit, OCVPE, must first be set. When the interrupt is enabled, the
stack is not full and a user-defined current or voltage condition occurs, a subroutine call to the
OCVP Interrupt vector, will take place. When the OCVP Interrupt is serviced, the EMI bit will be
automatically cleared to disable other interrupts and the OCVP interrupt request flag will be also
automatically cleared.
Multi-function Interrupts
Within the device there are four Multi-function interrupts. Unlike the other independent interrupts,
these interrupts have no independent source, but rather are formed from other existing interrupt
sources, namely the TM Interrupts, LVD Interrupt, I2C Interrupt and EEPROM Interrupt.
A Multi-function interrupt request will take place when any of the Multi-function interrupt request
flags, MFnF are set. The Multi-function interrupt flags will be set when any of their included
functions generate an interrupt request flag. To allow the program to branch to its respective interrupt
vector address, when the Multi-function interrupt is enabled and the stack is not full, and either one
of the interrupts contained within each of Multi-function interrupt occurs, a subroutine call to one of
the Multi-function interrupt vectors will take place. When the interrupt is serviced, the related MultiFunction request flag, will be automatically reset and the EMI bit will be automatically cleared to
disable other interrupts.
However, it must be noted that, although the Multi-function Interrupt flags will be automatically
reset when the interrupt is serviced, the request flags from the original source of the Multi-function
interrupts, namely the TM Interrupts, LVD Interrupt, I2C Interrupt and EEPROM Interrupt will not
be automatically reset and must be manually reset by the application program.
Time Base Interrupts
The function of the Time Base interrupts is to provide regular time signal in the form of an internal
interrupt. They are controlled by the overflow signals from their respective timer functions. When
these happens their respective interrupt request flags, TB0F or TB1F will be set. To allow the
program to branch to their respective interrupt vector addresses, the global interrupt enable bit, EMI
and Time Base enable bits, TB0E or TB1E, must first be set. When the interrupt is enabled, the stack
is not full and the Time Base overflows, a subroutine call to their respective vector locations will
take place. When the interrupt is serviced, the respective interrupt request flag, TB0F or TB1F, will
be automatically reset and the EMI bit will be cleared to disable other interrupts.
The purpose of the Time Base Interrupt is to provide an interrupt signal at fixed time periods. Their
clock sources originate from the internal clock source fTB. This fTB input clock passes through a
divider, the division ratio of which is selected by programming the appropriate bits in the TBC
register to obtain longer interrupt periods whose value ranges. The clock source that generates fTB,
which in turn controls the Time Base interrupt period, can originate from several different sources
which is selected using the TBCK bit in the TBC register.
Rev. 1.00
124
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
TBC Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
TBON
TBCK
TB11
TB10
—
TB02
TB01
TB00
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
0
0
1
1
—
1
1
1
Bit 7TBON: TB0 and TB1 Control bit
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit 6TBCK: Select fTB Clock Source
0: fTBC
1: fSYS/4
Bit 5 ~ 4
TB11 ~ TB10: Select Time Base 1 Time-out Period
00: 212/fTB
01: 213/fTB
10: 214/fTB
11: 215/fTB
Bit 3
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 2 ~ 0
TB02 ~ TB00: Select Time Base 0 Time-out Period
000: 28/fTB
001: 29/fTB
010: 210/fTB
011: 211/fTB
100: 212/fTB
101: 213/fTB
110: 214/fTB
111: 215/fTB
 Time Base Interrupt
I2C Interrupt
The I2C interrupt is contained within the Multi-function Interrupt.An I2C Interrupt request will
take place when the I2C Interrupt request flag, IICF, is set, which occurs when a byte of data has
been received or transmitted by the I2C interface, I2C address match or I2C time-out. To allow the
program to branch to its respective interrupt vector address, the global interrupt enable bit, EMI,
and the Serial Interface Interrupt enable bit, IICE, and associated Multi-function interrupt enable
bit, MF3E, must first be set. When the interrupt is enabled, the stack is not full and any of these
situations occurs, a subroutine call to the respective I2C interrupt vector, will take place. When
the I2C Interface Interrupt is serviced, the EMI bit will be automatically cleared to disable other
interrupts, however only the Multi-function interrupt request flag will be also automatically cleared.
As the IICF flag will not be automatically cleared, it has to be cleeared by the application program.
Rev. 1.00
125
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
EEPROM Interrupt
The EEPROM interrupt is contained within the Multi-function Interrupt. An EEPROM Interrupt
request will take place when the EEPROM Interrupt request flag, DEF, is set, which occurs
when an EEPROM Write cycle ends. To allow the program to branch to its respective interrupt
vector address, the global interrupt enable bit, EMI, and EEPROM Interrupt enable bit, DEE,
and associated Multi-function interrupt enable bit, MF3E, must first be set. When the interrupt is
enabled, the stack is not full and an EEPROM Write cycle ends, a subroutine call to the respective
EEPROM Interrupt vector, will take place. When the EEPROM Interrupt is serviced, the EMI bit
will be automatically cleared to disable other interrupts, however only the Multi-function interrupt
request flag will be also automatically cleared. As the DEF flag will not be automatically cleared, it
has to be cleared by the application program.
LVD Interrupt
The LVD interrupt is contained within the Multi-function Interrupt. An LVD Interrupt request will
take place when the LVD Interrupt request flag, LVF, is set, which occurs when the Low Voltage
Detector function detects a low power supply voltage. To allow the program to branch to its
respective interrupt vector address, the global interrupt enable bit, EMI, and Low Voltage Interrupt
enable bit, LVE, and associated Multi-function interrupt enable bit, MF3E, must first be set. When
the interrupt is enabled, the stack is not full and a low voltage condition occurs, a subroutine call to
the LVD Interrupt vector, will take place. When the Low Voltage Interrupt is serviced, the EMI bit
will be automatically cleared to disable other interrupts, however only the Multi-function interrupt
request flag will be also automatically cleared. As the LVD interrupt request flag, LVF, will not be
automatically cleared, it has to be cleared by the application program.
TM Interrupts
The Compact, Standard and Periodic Type TMs each have two interrupts. All of the TM interrupts
are contained within the Multi-function Interrupts. For the different Type TMs there are two
interrupt request flags xTMnPF and xTMnAF and two enable bits xTMnPE and xTMnAE. A TM
interrupt request will take place when any of the TM request flags are set, a situation which occurs
when a TM comparator P or comparator A match situation happens.
To allow the program to branch to its respective interrupt vector address, the global interrupt enable
bit, EMI, and the respective TM Interrupt enable bit, and associated Multi-function interrupt enable
bit, MFnF, must first be set. When the interrupt is enabled, the stack is not full and a TM comparator
match situation occurs, a subroutine call to the relevant TM Interrupt vector locations, will take
place. When the TM interrupt is serviced, the EMI bit will be automatically cleared to disable other
interrupts, however only the related MFnF flag will be automatically cleared. As the TM interrupt
request flags will not be automatically cleared, they have to be cleared by the application program.
Rev. 1.00
126
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Interrupt Wake-up Function
Each of the interrupt functions has the capability of waking up the microcontroller when in the
SLEEP or IDLE Mode. A wake-up is generated when an interrupt request flag changes from low to
high and is independent of whether the interrupt is enabled or not. Therefore, even though the device
is in the SLEEP or IDLE Mode and its system oscillator stopped, situations such as external edge
transitions on the external interrupt pins or a low power supply voltage may cause their respective
interrupt flag to be set high and consequently generate an interrupt. Care must therefore be taken if
spurious wake-up situations are to be avoided. If an interrupt wake-up function is to be disabled then
the corresponding interrupt request flag should be set high before the device enters the SLEEP or
IDLE Mode. The interrupt enable bits have no effect on the interrupt wake-up function.
Programming Considerations
By disabling the relevant interrupt enable bits, a requested interrupt can be prevented from being
serviced, however, once an interrupt request flag is set, it will remain in this condition in the
interrupt register until the corresponding interrupt is serviced or until the request flag is cleared by
the application program.
Where a certain interrupt is contained within a Multi-function interrupt, then when the interrupt
service routine is executed, as only the Multi-function interrupt request flags, MF0F~MF3F, will
be automatically cleared, the individual request flag for the function needs to be cleared by the
application program.
It is recommended that programs do not use the "CALL" instruction within the interrupt service
subroutine. Interrupts often occur in an unpredictable manner or need to be serviced immediately.
If only one stack is left and the interrupt is not well controlled, the original control sequence will be
damaged once a CALL subroutine is executed in the interrupt subroutine.
Every interrupt has the capability of waking up the microcontroller when it is in SLEEP or IDLE
Mode, the wake up being generated when the interrupt request flag changes from low to high. If it is
required to prevent a certain interrupt from waking up the microcontroller then its respective request
flag should be first set high before enter SLEEP or IDLE Mode.
As only the Program Counter is pushed onto the stack, then when the interrupt is serviced, if the
contents of the accumulator, status register or other registers are altered by the interrupt service
program, their contents should be saved to the memory at the beginning of the interrupt service
routine.
To return from an interrupt subroutine, either a RET or RETI instruction may be executed. The RETI
instruction in addition to executing a return to the main program also automatically sets the EMI
bit high to allow further interrupts. The RET instruction however only executes a return to the main
program leaving the EMI bit in its present zero state and therefore disabling the execution of further
interrupts.
Rev. 1.00
127
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Low Voltage Detector – LVD
The device has a Low Voltage Detector function, also known as LVD. This enables the device to
monitor the power supply voltage, VDD, and provides a warning signal should it fall below a certain
level. This function may be especially useful in battery applications where the supply voltage will
gradually reduce as the battery ages, as it allows an early warning battery low signal to be generated.
The Low Voltage Detector also has the capability of generating an interrupt signal.
LVD Register
The Low Voltage Detector function is controlled using a single register with the name LVDC. Three
bits in this register, VLVD2~VLVD0, are used to select one of eight fixed voltages below which
a low voltage condition will be determined. A low voltage condition is indicated when the LVDO
bit is set. If the LVDO bit is low, this indicates that the VDD voltage is above the preset low voltage
value. The LVDEN bit is used to control the overall on/off function of the low voltage detector.
Setting the bit high will enable the low voltage detector. Clearing the bit to zero will switch off the
internal low voltage detector circuits. As the low voltage detector will consume a certain amount of
power, it may be desirable to switch off the circuit when not in use, an important consideration in
power sensitive battery powered applications.
LVDC Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
—
LVDO
LVDEN
—
VLVD2
VLVD1
VLVD0
R/W
—
—
R
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
POR
—
—
0
0
—
0
0
0
Bit 7 ~ 6
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 5LVDO: LVD Output Flag
0: No Low Voltage Detected
1: Low Voltage Detected
Bit 4LVDEN: Low Voltage Detector Control
0: Disable
1: Enable
Rev. 1.00
Bit 3 Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 2~0
VLVD2 ~ VLVD0: Select LVD Voltage
000: 2.0V
001: 2.2V
010: 2.4V
011: 2.7V
100: 3.0V
101: 3.3V
110: 3.6V
111: 4.0V
128
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
LVD Operation
The Low Voltage Detector function operates by comparing the power supply voltage, VDD, with a
pre-specified voltage level stored in the LVDC register. This has a range of between 2.0V and 4.0V.
When the power supply voltage, VDD, falls below this pre-determined value, the LVDO bit will be
set high indicating a low power supply voltage condition. The Low Voltage Detector function is
supplied by a reference voltage which will be automatically enabled. After enabling the Low Voltage
Detector, a time delay tLVDS should be allowed for the circuitry to stabilise before reading the LVDO
bit. Note also that as the VDD voltage may rise and fall rather slowly, at the voltage nears that of
VLVD, there may be multiple bit LVDO transitions.
LVD Operation
The Low Voltage Detector also has its own interrupt which is contained within one of the multifunction interrupts, providing an alternative means of low voltage detection, in addition to polling
the LVDO bit. The interrupt will only be generated after a delay of tLVD after the LVDO bit has been
set high by a low voltage condition. In this case, the LVF interrupt request flag will be set, causing
an interrupt to be generated if VDD falls below the preset LVD voltage. This will cause the device to
wake-up from the SLEEP or IDLE Mode, however if the Low Voltage Detector wake up function is
not required then the LVF flag should be first set high before the device enters the SLEEP or IDLE
Mode.
Rev. 1.00
129
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
LCD SCOM Function
The device has the capability of driving external LCD panels. The common pins for LCD driving,
SCOM0~SCOM3, are pin shared with certain pins on the I/O ports. The LCD signals (COM) are
generated using the application program.
LCD Operation
An external LCD panel can be driven using this device by configuring the I/O pins as common pins.
The LCD driver function is controlled using the SCOMC register which in addition to controlling
the overall on/off function also controls the bias voltage setup function. This enables the LCD COM
driver to generate the necessary VDD/2 voltage levels for LCD 1/2 bias operation.
The SCOMEN bit in the SCOMC register is the overall master control for the LCD driver. The
LCD SCOMn pin is selected to be used for LCD driving by the corresponding pin-shared function
selection bits. Note that the Port Control register does not need to first setup the pins as outputs to
enable the LCD driver operation.
VDD
SCO� operating current
VDD/�
SCO�0~SCO��
Pin-shared selection bits
SCO�EN
LCD COM Bias
LCD Bias Current Control
The LCD COM driver enables a range of selections to be provided to suit the requirement of the
LCD panel which are being used. The bias resistor choice is implemented using the ISEL1 and
ISEL0 bits in the SCOMC register.
SCOMC Register
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
—
ISEL1
ISEL0
SCOMEN
—
—
—
—
R/W
—
R/W
R/W
R/W
—
—
—
—
POR
—
0
0
0
—
—
—
—
Bit 7
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Bit 6~5ISEL1~ISEL0: Select resistor for R type LCD different bias current (VDD=5V)
00: 2×100kΩ (1/2 Bias), IBIAS = 25μA
01: 2×50kΩ (1/2 Bias), IBIAS = 50μA
10: 2×25kΩ (1/2 Bias), IBIAS = 100μA
11: 2×12.5kΩ (1/2 Bias), IBIAS = 200μA
Bit 4SCOMEN: LCD function enable control bit
0: Disable
1: Enable
When SCOMEN is set high, it will turn on the DC path of resistor to generate 1/2 VDD
bias voltage.
Bit 3~0
Unimplemented, read as "0"
Rev. 1.00
130
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Configuration Option
Configuration options refer to certain options within the MCU that are programmed into the device
during the programming process. During the development process, these options are selected using
the HT-IDE software development tools. As these options are programmed into the device using
the hardware programming tools, once they are selected they cannot be changed later using the
application program. All options must be defined for proper system function, the details of which are
shown in the table.
No.
Options
Watchdog Timer Option
Watchdog Timer Enable/disable Selection:
Controlled by WDTC register
Always enabled
1
Application Circuit
+24V
L1
4.7uH
+5V
C1
24VIN
OCVPAI0/INT0/CTCK0/PA3
23
C3
104
+
C2
10uF/10V
PTP1/PC1
VDD
12
24
4
OCVP0AI0/STP0/PA4
PA2/SCL/ICPCK/OCDSCK
OCVP0CI/INT1/STCK0/PA5
PA0/SDA/ICPDA/OCDSDA
VSS
5 VREF/PTCK0/PA7
7
8
9
11
13
SCOM3/PB7
PB5/SCOM1
SCOM2/PB6
PB4/SCOM0
1
10
14
R1
R2
2
20K
20K
PC3 15
16
PC2
PTCK1/PC0
6
1
104/400V
U3
Nebulising Chip
3
3
2
U1
CON1 +24V
2
1
C4
104
C5
104
R3
1 ohm
17
18
19
PC4
OCVPAI0/PB3
PC5
OCVPAI0/PB2
OCVPAO0/CTP0/PA1
OCVPAI0/PB1
OCVPAOI0/PTP0/PA6
OCVPAI0/PB0 22
20
21
HT45F3830_24SOP
+24V
C8
104
VIN
7805
GND
C6 +
10uF/50V
U2
2
1
+5V
VOUT
3
C9
104
+ C7
10uF/10V
GND GND
Rev. 1.00
131
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Instruction Set
Introduction
Central to the successful operation of any microcontroller is its instruction set, which is a set of
program instruction codes that directs the microcontroller to perform certain operations. In the case
of Holtek microcontroller, a comprehensive and flexible set of over 60 instructions is provided to
enable programmers to implement their application with the minimum of programming overheads.
For easier understanding of the various instruction codes, they have been subdivided into several
functional groupings.
Instruction Timing
Most instructions are implemented within one instruction cycle. The exceptions to this are branch,
call, or table read instructions where two instruction cycles are required. One instruction cycle is
equal to 4 system clock cycles, therefore in the case of an 8MHz system oscillator, most instructions
would be implemented within 0.5μs and branch or call instructions would be implemented within
1μs. Although instructions which require one more cycle to implement are generally limited to
the JMP, CALL, RET, RETI and table read instructions, it is important to realize that any other
instructions which involve manipulation of the Program Counter Low register or PCL will also take
one more cycle to implement. As instructions which change the contents of the PCL will imply a
direct jump to that new address, one more cycle will be required. Examples of such instructions
would be "CLR PCL" or "MOV PCL, A". For the case of skip instructions, it must be noted that if
the result of the comparison involves a skip operation then this will also take one more cycle, if no
skip is involved then only one cycle is required.
Moving and Transferring Data
The transfer of data within the microcontroller program is one of the most frequently used
operations. Making use of three kinds of MOV instructions, data can be transferred from registers to
the Accumulator and vice-versa as well as being able to move specific immediate data directly into
the Accumulator. One of the most important data transfer applications is to receive data from the
input ports and transfer data to the output ports.
Arithmetic Operations
The ability to perform certain arithmetic operations and data manipulation is a necessary feature of
most microcontroller applications. Within the Holtek microcontroller instruction set are a range of
add and subtract instruction mnemonics to enable the necessary arithmetic to be carried out. Care
must be taken to ensure correct handling of carry and borrow data when results exceed 255 for
addition and less than 0 for subtraction. The increment and decrement instructions INC, INCA, DEC
and DECA provide a simple means of increasing or decreasing by a value of one of the values in the
destination specified.
Rev. 1.00
132
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Logical and Rotate Operation
The standard logical operations such as AND, OR, XOR and CPL all have their own instruction
within the Holtek microcontroller instruction set. As with the case of most instructions involving
data manipulation, data must pass through the Accumulator which may involve additional
programming steps. In all logical data operations, the zero flag may be set if the result of the
operation is zero. Another form of logical data manipulation comes from the rotate instructions such
as RR, RL, RRC and RLC which provide a simple means of rotating one bit right or left. Different
rotate instructions exist depending on program requirements. Rotate instructions are useful for serial
port programming applications where data can be rotated from an internal register into the Carry
bit from where it can be examined and the necessary serial bit set high or low. Another application
which rotate data operations are used is to implement multiplication and division calculations.
Branches and Control Transfer
Program branching takes the form of either jumps to specified locations using the JMP instruction
or to a subroutine using the CALL instruction. They differ in the sense that in the case of a
subroutine call, the program must return to the instruction immediately when the subroutine has
been carried out. This is done by placing a return instruction "RET" in the subroutine which will
cause the program to jump back to the address right after the CALL instruction. In the case of a JMP
instruction, the program simply jumps to the desired location. There is no requirement to jump back
to the original jumping off point as in the case of the CALL instruction. One special and extremely
useful set of branch instructions are the conditional branches. Here a decision is first made regarding
the condition of a certain data memory or individual bits. Depending upon the conditions, the
program will continue with the next instruction or skip over it and jump to the following instruction.
These instructions are the key to decision making and branching within the program perhaps
determined by the condition of certain input switches or by the condition of internal data bits.
Bit Operations
The ability to provide single bit operations on Data Memory is an extremely flexible feature of all
Holtek microcontrollers. This feature is especially useful for output port bit programming where
individual bits or port pins can be directly set high or low using either the "SET [m].i" or "CLR [m].
i" instructions respectively. The feature removes the need for programmers to first read the 8-bit
output port, manipulate the input data to ensure that other bits are not changed and then output the
port with the correct new data. This read-modify-write process is taken care of automatically when
these bit operation instructions are used.
Table Read Operations
Data storage is normally implemented by using registers. However, when working with large
amounts of fixed data, the volume involved often makes it inconvenient to store the fixed data in
the Data Memory. To overcome this problem, Holtek microcontrollers allow an area of Program
Memory to be set as a table where data can be directly stored. A set of easy to use instructions
provides the means by which this fixed data can be referenced and retrieved from the Program
Memory.
Other Operations
In addition to the above functional instructions, a range of other instructions also exist such as
the "HALT" instruction for Power-down operations and instructions to control the operation of
the Watchdog Timer for reliable program operations under extreme electric or electromagnetic
environments. For their relevant operations, refer to the functional related sections.
Rev. 1.00
133
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Instruction Set Summary
The following table depicts a summary of the instruction set categorised according to function and
can be consulted as a basic instruction reference using the following listed conventions.
Table Conventions
x: Bits immediate data
m: Data Memory address
A: Accumulator
i: 0~7 number of bits
addr: Program memory address
Mnemonic
Description
Cycles
Flag Affected
Add Data Memory to ACC
Add ACC to Data Memory
Add immediate data to ACC
Add Data Memory to ACC with Carry
Add ACC to Data memory with Carry
Subtract immediate data from the ACC
Subtract Data Memory from ACC
Subtract Data Memory from ACC with result in Data Memory
Subtract Data Memory from ACC with Carry
Subtract Data Memory from ACC with Carry, result in Data Memory
Decimal adjust ACC for Addition with result in Data Memory
1
1Note
1
1
1Note
1
1
1Note
1
1Note
1Note
Z, C, AC, OV
Z, C, AC, OV
Z, C, AC, OV
Z, C, AC, OV
Z, C, AC, OV
Z, C, AC, OV
Z, C, AC, OV
Z, C, AC, OV
Z, C, AC, OV
Z, C, AC, OV
C
1
1
1
1Note
1Note
1Note
1
1
1
1Note
1
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Increment Data Memory with result in ACC
Increment Data Memory
Decrement Data Memory with result in ACC
Decrement Data Memory
1
1Note
1
1Note
Z
Z
Z
Z
Rotate Data Memory right with result in ACC
Rotate Data Memory right
Rotate Data Memory right through Carry with result in ACC
Rotate Data Memory right through Carry
Rotate Data Memory left with result in ACC
Rotate Data Memory left
Rotate Data Memory left through Carry with result in ACC
Rotate Data Memory left through Carry
1
1Note
1
1Note
1
1Note
1
1Note
None
None
C
C
None
None
C
C
Arithmetic
ADD A,[m]
ADDM A,[m]
ADD A,x
ADC A,[m]
ADCM A,[m]
SUB A,x
SUB A,[m]
SUBM A,[m]
SBC A,[m]
SBCM A,[m]
DAA [m]
Logic Operation
AND A,[m]
Logical AND Data Memory to ACC
OR A,[m]
Logical OR Data Memory to ACC
XOR A,[m]
Logical XOR Data Memory to ACC
ANDM A,[m]
Logical AND ACC to Data Memory
ORM A,[m]
Logical OR ACC to Data Memory
XORM A,[m]
Logical XOR ACC to Data Memory
AND A,x
Logical AND immediate Data to ACC
OR A,x
Logical OR immediate Data to ACC
XOR A,x
Logical XOR immediate Data to ACC
CPL [m]
Complement Data Memory
CPLA [m]
Complement Data Memory with result in ACC
Increment & Decrement
INCA [m]
INC [m]
DECA [m]
DEC [m]
Rotate
RRA [m]
RR [m]
RRCA [m]
RRC [m]
RLA [m]
RL [m]
RLCA [m]
RLC [m]
Rev. 1.00
134
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Mnemonic
Description
Cycles
Flag Affected
Move Data Memory to ACC
Move ACC to Data Memory
Move immediate data to ACC
1
1Note
1
None
None
None
Clear bit of Data Memory
Set bit of Data Memory
1Note
1Note
None
None
Jump unconditionally
Skip if Data Memory is zero
Skip if Data Memory is zero with data movement to ACC
Skip if bit i of Data Memory is zero
Skip if bit i of Data Memory is not zero
Skip if increment Data Memory is zero
Skip if decrement Data Memory is zero
Skip if increment Data Memory is zero with result in ACC
Skip if decrement Data Memory is zero with result in ACC
Subroutine call
Return from subroutine
Return from subroutine and load immediate data to ACC
Return from interrupt
2
1Note
1Note
1Note
1Note
1Note
1Note
1Note
1Note
2
2
2
2
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Read table (specific page) to TBLH and Data Memory
Read table (current page) to TBLH and Data Memory
Read table (last page) to TBLH and Data Memory
2Note
2Note
2Note
None
None
None
No operation
Clear Data Memory
Set Data Memory
Clear Watchdog Timer
Pre-clear Watchdog Timer
Pre-clear Watchdog Timer
Swap nibbles of Data Memory
Swap nibbles of Data Memory with result in ACC
Enter power down mode
1
1Note
1Note
1
1
1
1Note
1
1
None
None
None
TO, PDF
TO, PDF
TO, PDF
None
None
TO, PDF
Data Move
MOV A,[m]
MOV [m],A
MOV A,x
Bit Operation
CLR [m].i
SET [m].i
Branch Operation
JMP addr
SZ [m]
SZA [m]
SZ [m].i
SNZ [m].i
SIZ [m]
SDZ [m]
SIZA [m]
SDZA [m]
CALL addr
RET
RET A,x
RETI
Table Read Operation
TABRD [m]
TABRDC [m]
TABRDL [m]
Miscellaneous
NOP
CLR [m]
SET [m]
CLR WDT
CLR WDT1
CLR WDT2
SWAP [m]
SWAPA [m]
HALT
Note: 1. For skip instructions, if the result of the comparison involves a skip then two cycles are required, if no
skip takes place only one cycle is required.
2. Any instruction which changes the contents of the PCL will also require 2 cycles for execution.
3. For the "CLR WDT1" and "CLR WDT2" instructions the TO and PDF flags may be affected by the
execution status. The TO and PDF flags are cleared after both "CLR WDT1" and "CLR WDT2"
instructions are consecutively executed. Otherwise the TO and PDF flags remain unchanged.
Rev. 1.00
135
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Instruction Definition
ADC A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Add Data Memory to ACC with Carry
The contents of the specified Data Memory, Accumulator and the carry flag are added.
The result is stored in the Accumulator.
ACC ← ACC + [m] + C
OV, Z, AC, C
ADCM A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Add ACC to Data Memory with Carry
The contents of the specified Data Memory, Accumulator and the carry flag are added. The result is stored in the specified Data Memory.
[m] ← ACC + [m] + C
OV, Z, AC, C
Add Data Memory to ACC
ADD A,[m]
Description
The contents of the specified Data Memory and the Accumulator are added.
The result is stored in the Accumulator.
Operation
Affected flag(s)
ACC ← ACC + [m]
OV, Z, AC, C
ADD A,x
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Add immediate data to ACC
The contents of the Accumulator and the specified immediate data are added. The result is stored in the Accumulator.
ACC ← ACC + x
OV, Z, AC, C
ADDM A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Add ACC to Data Memory
The contents of the specified Data Memory and the Accumulator are added. The result is stored in the specified Data Memory.
[m] ← ACC + [m]
OV, Z, AC, C
AND A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Logical AND Data Memory to ACC
Data in the Accumulator and the specified Data Memory perform a bitwise logical AND operation. The result is stored in the Accumulator.
ACC ← ACC ″AND″ [m]
Z
AND A,x
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Logical AND immediate data to ACC
Data in the Accumulator and the specified immediate data perform a bit wise logical AND operation. The result is stored in the Accumulator.
ACC ← ACC ″AND″ x
Z
ANDM A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Logical AND ACC to Data Memory
Data in the specified Data Memory and the Accumulator perform a bitwise logical AND
operation. The result is stored in the Data Memory.
[m] ← ACC ″AND″ [m]
Z
Rev. 1.00
136
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
CALL addr
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Subroutine call
Unconditionally calls a subroutine at the specified address. The Program Counter then
increments by 1 to obtain the address of the next instruction which is then pushed onto the
stack. The specified address is then loaded and the program continues execution from this
new address. As this instruction requires an additional operation, it is a two cycle instruction.
Stack ← Program Counter + 1
Program Counter ← addr
None
CLR [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Clear Data Memory
Each bit of the specified Data Memory is cleared to 0.
[m] ← 00H
None
CLR [m].i
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Clear bit of Data Memory
Bit i of the specified Data Memory is cleared to 0.
[m].i ← 0
None
CLR WDT
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Clear Watchdog Timer
The TO, PDF flags and the WDT are all cleared.
WDT cleared
TO ← 0
PDF ← 0
TO, PDF
CLR WDT1
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Pre-clear Watchdog Timer
The TO, PDF flags and the WDT are all cleared. Note that this instruction works in
conjunction with CLR WDT2 and must be executed alternately with CLR WDT2 to have
effect. Repetitively executing this instruction without alternately executing CLR WDT2 will
have no effect.
WDT cleared
TO ← 0
PDF ← 0
TO, PDF
CLR WDT2
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Pre-clear Watchdog Timer
The TO, PDF flags and the WDT are all cleared. Note that this instruction works in conjunction
with CLR WDT1 and must be executed alternately with CLR WDT1 to have effect.
Repetitively executing this instruction without alternately executing CLR WDT1 will have no
effect.
WDT cleared
TO ← 0
PDF ← 0
TO, PDF
CPL [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Complement Data Memory
Each bit of the specified Data Memory is logically complemented (1′s complement). Bits which
previously contained a 1 are changed to 0 and vice versa.
[m] ← [m]
Z
Rev. 1.00
137
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
CPLA [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Complement Data Memory with result in ACC
Each bit of the specified Data Memory is logically complemented (1′s complement). Bits which
previously contained a 1 are changed to 0 and vice versa. The complemented result is stored in
the Accumulator and the contents of the Data Memory remain unchanged.
ACC ← [m]
Z
DAA [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Decimal-Adjust ACC for addition with result in Data Memory
Convert the contents of the Accumulator value to a BCD (Binary Coded Decimal) value
resulting from the previous addition of two BCD variables. If the low nibble is greater than 9
or if AC flag is set, then a value of 6 will be added to the low nibble. Otherwise the low nibble
remains unchanged. If the high nibble is greater than 9 or if the C flag is set, then a value of 6
will be added to the high nibble. Essentially, the decimal conversion is performed by adding
00H, 06H, 60H or 66H depending on the Accumulator and flag conditions. Only the C flag
may be affected by this instruction which indicates that if the original BCD sum is greater than
100, it allows multiple precision decimal addition.
[m] ← ACC + 00H or
[m] ← ACC + 06H or [m] ← ACC + 60H or
[m] ← ACC + 66H
C
DEC [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Decrement Data Memory
Data in the specified Data Memory is decremented by 1.
[m] ← [m] − 1
Z
DECA [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Decrement Data Memory with result in ACC
Data in the specified Data Memory is decremented by 1. The result is stored in the
Accumulator. The contents of the Data Memory remain unchanged.
ACC ← [m] − 1
Z
HALT
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Enter power down mode
This instruction stops the program execution and turns off the system clock. The contents of the Data Memory and registers are retained. The WDT and prescaler are cleared. The power
down flag PDF is set and the WDT time-out flag TO is cleared.
TO ← 0
PDF ← 1
TO, PDF
INC [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Increment Data Memory
Data in the specified Data Memory is incremented by 1.
[m] ← [m] + 1
Z
INCA [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Increment Data Memory with result in ACC
Data in the specified Data Memory is incremented by 1. The result is stored in the Accumulator.
The contents of the Data Memory remain unchanged.
ACC ← [m] + 1
Z
Rev. 1.00
138
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
JMP addr
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Jump unconditionally
The contents of the Program Counter are replaced with the specified address. Program
execution then continues from this new address. As this requires the insertion of a dummy
instruction while the new address is loaded, it is a two cycle instruction.
Program Counter ← addr
None
MOV A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Move Data Memory to ACC
The contents of the specified Data Memory are copied to the Accumulator.
ACC ← [m]
None
MOV A,x
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Move immediate data to ACC
The immediate data specified is loaded into the Accumulator.
ACC ← x
None
MOV [m],A
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Move ACC to Data Memory
The contents of the Accumulator are copied to the specified Data Memory.
[m] ← ACC
None
NOP
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
No operation
No operation is performed. Execution continues with the next instruction.
No operation
None
OR A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Logical OR Data Memory to ACC
Data in the Accumulator and the specified Data Memory perform a bitwise
logical OR operation. The result is stored in the Accumulator.
ACC ← ACC ″OR″ [m]
Z
OR A,x
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Logical OR immediate data to ACC
Data in the Accumulator and the specified immediate data perform a bitwise logical OR operation. The result is stored in the Accumulator.
ACC ← ACC ″OR″ x
Z
ORM A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Logical OR ACC to Data Memory
Data in the specified Data Memory and the Accumulator perform a bitwise logical OR operation. The result is stored in the Data Memory.
[m] ← ACC ″OR″ [m]
Z
RET
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Return from subroutine
The Program Counter is restored from the stack. Program execution continues at the restored
address.
Program Counter ← Stack
None
Rev. 1.00
139
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
RET A,x
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Return from subroutine and load immediate data to ACC
The Program Counter is restored from the stack and the Accumulator loaded with the specified immediate data. Program execution continues at the restored address.
Program Counter ← Stack
ACC ← x
None
RETI
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Return from interrupt
The Program Counter is restored from the stack and the interrupts are re-enabled by setting the
EMI bit. EMI is the master interrupt global enable bit. If an interrupt was pending when the RETI instruction is executed, the pending Interrupt routine will be processed before returning to the main program.
Program Counter ← Stack
EMI ← 1
None
RL [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Rotate Data Memory left
The contents of the specified Data Memory are rotated left by 1 bit with bit 7 rotated into bit 0.
[m].(i+1) ← [m].i; (i=0~6)
[m].0 ← [m].7
None
RLA [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Rotate Data Memory left with result in ACC
The contents of the specified Data Memory are rotated left by 1 bit with bit 7 rotated into bit 0.
The rotated result is stored in the Accumulator and the contents of the Data Memory remain
unchanged.
ACC.(i+1) ← [m].i; (i=0~6)
ACC.0 ← [m].7
None
RLC [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Rotate Data Memory left through Carry
The contents of the specified Data Memory and the carry flag are rotated left by 1 bit. Bit 7
replaces the Carry bit and the original carry flag is rotated into bit 0.
[m].(i+1) ← [m].i; (i=0~6)
[m].0 ← C
C ← [m].7
C
RLCA [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Rotate Data Memory left through Carry with result in ACC
Data in the specified Data Memory and the carry flag are rotated left by 1 bit. Bit 7 replaces the
Carry bit and the original carry flag is rotated into the bit 0. The rotated result is stored in the
Accumulator and the contents of the Data Memory remain unchanged.
ACC.(i+1) ← [m].i; (i=0~6)
ACC.0 ← C
C ← [m].7
C
RR [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Rotate Data Memory right
The contents of the specified Data Memory are rotated right by 1 bit with bit 0 rotated into bit 7.
[m].i ← [m].(i+1); (i=0~6)
[m].7 ← [m].0
None
Rev. 1.00
140
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
RRA [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Rotate Data Memory right with result in ACC
Data in the specified Data Memory is rotated right by 1 bit with bit 0 rotated into bit 7. The rotated result is stored in the Accumulator and the contents of the Data Memory remain unchanged.
ACC.i ← [m].(i+1); (i=0~6)
ACC.7 ← [m].0
None
RRC [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Rotate Data Memory right through Carry
The contents of the specified Data Memory and the carry flag are rotated right by 1 bit. Bit 0
replaces the Carry bit and the original carry flag is rotated into bit 7.
[m].i ← [m].(i+1); (i=0~6)
[m].7 ← C
C ← [m].0
C
RRCA [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Rotate Data Memory right through Carry with result in ACC
Data in the specified Data Memory and the carry flag are rotated right by 1 bit. Bit 0 replaces the Carry bit and the original carry flag is rotated into bit 7. The rotated result is stored in the Accumulator and the contents of the Data Memory remain unchanged.
ACC.i ← [m].(i+1); (i=0~6)
ACC.7 ← C
C ← [m].0
C
SBC A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Subtract Data Memory from ACC with Carry
The contents of the specified Data Memory and the complement of the carry flag are
subtracted from the Accumulator. The result is stored in the Accumulator. Note that if the result of subtraction is negative, the C flag will be cleared to 0, otherwise if the result is
positive or zero, the C flag will be set to 1.
ACC ← ACC − [m] − C
OV, Z, AC, C
SBCM A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Subtract Data Memory from ACC with Carry and result in Data Memory
The contents of the specified Data Memory and the complement of the carry flag are subtracted from the Accumulator. The result is stored in the Data Memory. Note that if the result of subtraction is negative, the C flag will be cleared to 0, otherwise if the result is positive or zero, the C flag will be set to 1.
[m] ← ACC − [m] − C
OV, Z, AC, C
SDZ [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Skip if decrement Data Memory is 0
The contents of the specified Data Memory are first decremented by 1. If the result is 0 the following instruction is skipped. As this requires the insertion of a dummy instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle instruction. If the result is not 0 the program proceeds with the following instruction.
[m] ← [m] − 1
Skip if [m]=0
None
Rev. 1.00
141
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
SDZA [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Skip if decrement Data Memory is zero with result in ACC
The contents of the specified Data Memory are first decremented by 1. If the result is 0, the following instruction is skipped. The result is stored in the Accumulator but the specified Data Memory contents remain unchanged. As this requires the insertion of a dummy
instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle instruction. If the result is not 0,
the program proceeds with the following instruction.
ACC ← [m] − 1
Skip if ACC=0
None
SET [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Set Data Memory
Each bit of the specified Data Memory is set to 1.
[m] ← FFH
None
SET [m].i
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Set bit of Data Memory
Bit i of the specified Data Memory is set to 1.
[m].i ← 1
None
SIZ [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Skip if increment Data Memory is 0
The contents of the specified Data Memory are first incremented by 1. If the result is 0, the
following instruction is skipped. As this requires the insertion of a dummy instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle instruction. If the result is not 0 the program
proceeds with the following instruction.
[m] ← [m] + 1
Skip if [m]=0
None
SIZA [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Skip if increment Data Memory is zero with result in ACC
The contents of the specified Data Memory are first incremented by 1. If the result is 0, the following instruction is skipped. The result is stored in the Accumulator but the specified
Data Memory contents remain unchanged. As this requires the insertion of a dummy
instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle instruction. If the result is not
0 the program proceeds with the following instruction.
ACC ← [m] + 1
Skip if ACC=0
None
SNZ [m].i
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Skip if bit i of Data Memory is not 0
If bit i of the specified Data Memory is not 0, the following instruction is skipped. As this
requires the insertion of a dummy instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle instruction. If the result is 0 the program proceeds with the following instruction.
Skip if [m].i ≠ 0
None
SUB A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Subtract Data Memory from ACC
The specified Data Memory is subtracted from the contents of the Accumulator. The result is stored in the Accumulator. Note that if the result of subtraction is negative, the C flag will be cleared to 0, otherwise if the result is positive or zero, the C flag will be set to 1.
ACC ← ACC − [m]
OV, Z, AC, C
Rev. 1.00
142
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
SUBM A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Subtract Data Memory from ACC with result in Data Memory
The specified Data Memory is subtracted from the contents of the Accumulator. The result is stored in the Data Memory. Note that if the result of subtraction is negative, the C flag will be cleared to 0, otherwise if the result is positive or zero, the C flag will be set to 1.
[m] ← ACC − [m]
OV, Z, AC, C
SUB A,x
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Subtract immediate data from ACC
The immediate data specified by the code is subtracted from the contents of the Accumulator. The result is stored in the Accumulator. Note that if the result of subtraction is negative, the C flag will be cleared to 0, otherwise if the result is positive or zero, the C flag will be set to 1.
ACC ← ACC − x
OV, Z, AC, C
SWAP [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Swap nibbles of Data Memory
The low-order and high-order nibbles of the specified Data Memory are interchanged.
[m].3~[m].0 ↔ [m].7~[m].4
None
SWAPA [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Swap nibbles of Data Memory with result in ACC
The low-order and high-order nibbles of the specified Data Memory are interchanged. The result is stored in the Accumulator. The contents of the Data Memory remain unchanged.
ACC.3~ACC.0 ← [m].7~[m].4
ACC.7~ACC.4 ← [m].3~[m].0
None
SZ [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Skip if Data Memory is 0
If the contents of the specified Data Memory is 0, the following instruction is skipped. As this requires the insertion of a dummy instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle instruction. If the result is not 0 the program proceeds with the following instruction.
Skip if [m]=0
None
SZA [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Skip if Data Memory is 0 with data movement to ACC
The contents of the specified Data Memory are copied to the Accumulator. If the value is zero, the following instruction is skipped. As this requires the insertion of a dummy instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle instruction. If the result is not 0 the program proceeds with the following instruction.
ACC ← [m]
Skip if [m]=0
None
SZ [m].i
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Skip if bit i of Data Memory is 0
If bit i of the specified Data Memory is 0, the following instruction is skipped. As this requires
the insertion of a dummy instruction while the next instruction is fetched, it is a two cycle
instruction. If the result is not 0, the program proceeds with the following instruction.
Skip if [m].i=0
None
Rev. 1.00
143
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
TABRD [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Read table (specific page) to TBLH and Data Memory
The low byte of the program code (specific page) addressed by the table pointer pair (TBHP and TBLP) is moved to the specified Data Memory and the high byte moved to TBLH.
[m] ← program code (low byte)
TBLH ← program code (high byte)
None
TABRDC [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Read table (current page) to TBLH and Data Memory
The low byte of the program code (current page) addressed by the table pointer (TBLP) is moved to the specified Data Memory and the high byte moved to TBLH.
[m] ← program code (low byte)
TBLH ← program code (high byte)
None
TABRDL [m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Read table (last page) to TBLH and Data Memory
The low byte of the program code (last page) addressed by the table pointer (TBLP) is moved to the specified Data Memory and the high byte moved to TBLH.
[m] ← program code (low byte)
TBLH ← program code (high byte)
None
XOR A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Logical XOR Data Memory to ACC
Data in the Accumulator and the specified Data Memory perform a bitwise logical XOR operation. The result is stored in the Accumulator.
ACC ← ACC ″XOR″ [m]
Z
XORM A,[m]
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Logical XOR ACC to Data Memory
Data in the specified Data Memory and the Accumulator perform a bitwise logical XOR operation. The result is stored in the Data Memory.
[m] ← ACC ″XOR″ [m]
Z
XOR A,x
Description
Operation
Affected flag(s)
Logical XOR immediate data to ACC
Data in the Accumulator and the specified immediate data perform a bitwise logical XOR operation. The result is stored in the Accumulator.
ACC ← ACC ″XOR″ x
Z
Rev. 1.00
144
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Package Information
Note that the package information provided here is for consultation purposes only. As this
information may be updated at regular intervals users are reminded to consult the Holtek website for
the latest version of the Package/Carton Information.
Additional supplementary information with regard to packaging is listed below. Click on the relevant
section to be transferred to the relevant website page.
• Package Information (include Outline Dimensions, Product Tape and Reel Specifications)
• The Operation Instruction of Packing Materials
• Carton information
Rev. 1.00
145
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
16-pin NSOP (150mil) Outline Dimensions
Symbol
Dimensions in inch
Min.
Nom.
Max.
A
—
0.236 BSC
—
B
—
0.154 BSC
—
C
0.012
—
0.020
C’
—
0.390 BSC
—
D
—
—
0.069
E
—
0.050 BSC
—
F
0.004
—
0.010
G
0.016
—
0.050
H
0.004
—
0.010
α
0°
—
8°
Symbol
Rev. 1.00
Dimensions in mm
Min.
Nom.
Max.
A
—
6 BSC
—
B
—
3.9 BSC
—
C
0.31
—
0.51
C’
—
9.9 BSC
—
D
—
—
1.75
E
—
1.27 BSC
—
F
0.10
—
0.25
G
0.40
—
1.27
H
0.10
—
0.25
α
0°
—
8°
146
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
20-pin NSOP (150mil) Outline Dimensions
Symbol
Dimensions in inch
Min.
Nom.
Max.
A
0.228
0.236
0.244
B
0.146
0.154
0.161
C
0.009
—
0.012
C’
0.382
0.390
0.398
D
—
—
0.069
E
—
0.032 BSC
—
F
0.002
—
0.009
G
0.020
—
0.031
H
0.008
—
0.010
α
0°
—
8°
Symbol
Rev. 1.00
Dimensions in mm
Min.
Nom.
Max.
A
5.80
6.00
6.20
B
3.70
3.90
4.10
C
0.23
—
0.30
C’
9.70
9.90
10.10
1.75
D
—
—
E
—
0.80 BSC
—
F
0.05
—
0.23
G
0.50
—
0.80
H
0.21
—
0.25
α
0°
—
8°
147
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
24-pin SOP (300mil) Outline Dimensions
Symbol
Dimensions in inch
Min.
Nom.
Max.
A
—
0.406 BSC
—
B
—
0.295 BSC
—
C
0.012
—
0.020
C’
—
0.606 BSC
—
D
—
—
0.104
E
—
0.050 BSC
—
F
0.004
—
0.012
G
0.016
—
0.050
H
0.008
—
0.013
α
0°
—
8°
Symbol
Rev. 1.00
Dimensions in mm
Min.
Nom.
Max.
A
—
10.30 BSC
—
B
—
7.5 BSC
—
C
0.31
—
0.51
C’
—
15.4 BSC
—
D
—
—
2.65
E
—
1.27 BSC
—
F
0.10
—
0.30
G
0.40
—
1.27
H
0.20
—
0.33
α
0°
—
8°
148
May 30, 2016
HT45F3830
Ultrasonic Humidifier 8-Bit Flash MCU
Copyright© 2016 by HOLTEK SEMICONDUCTOR INC.
The information appearing in this Data Sheet is believed to be accurate at the time
of publication. However, Holtek assumes no responsibility arising from the use of
the specifications described. The applications mentioned herein are used solely
for the purpose of illustration and Holtek makes no warranty or representation that
such applications will be suitable without further modification, nor recommends
the use of its products for application that may present a risk to human life due to
malfunction or otherwise. Holtek's products are not authorized for use as critical
components in life support devices or systems. Holtek reserves the right to alter
its products without prior notification. For the most up-to-date information, please
visit our web site at http://www.holtek.com.tw.
Rev. 1.00
149
May 30, 2016